JP6534075B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  BACKGROUND Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of executing display effects using a character image, a symbol and the like using a display device triggered by a game ball winning in a starting opening (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  In such a gaming machine, it is possible to give a sense of excitement using display effects.

JP, 2016-29956, A

  However, even with the above-described gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the technology for improving the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to improve the interest of a game.

  The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following application example. In addition, the reference numerals in the parentheses in the column, the supplementary explanation, and the like indicate the correspondence with the embodiments to be described later in order to help the understanding of the present invention, and the present invention is not limited at all. .

Application Example 1
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects, and a first operation unit and a second operation unit operable by a player,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a first operation unit image representing the first operation unit while the decorative symbol is changing,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a mode suggestion image that suggests that the mode is being executed in one of a plurality of game modes while the decorative symbol is changing,
It said third display effect is a demonstration of the second operating part image representing the second operating unit during reach effect still appears,
There may be a combined effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect.
Wherein the combination effect, when the first display effect is being performed, the second display effect is performed, wherein the first operation portion image and the mode suggested image is displayed in correspondence, the When the first operation unit is operated, another mode suggestion image can be displayed, and the first display unit image and the mode suggestion image are displayed in association with each other, the third display When an effect is performed, and the second operation unit is operated by the player in a state in which the first operation unit image and the second operation unit image are displayed, the effect is different from the effect of displaying the mode suggestion image The prescribed effect of is performed,
A game machine characterized by

  According to the present invention, the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of a game machine. It is an enlarged view of indicators. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution by the side of the main control board of a game machine. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on a sub control board side of the gaming machine. It is a figure for demonstrating main ROM and main RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating sub ROM and sub RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating the various random numbers used in a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating determination tables T1-T4. It is an explanatory view of jackpot type determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of a non-time-short state. It is explanatory drawing of fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of time saving state. It is explanatory drawing of electric cho open | release pattern determination table T7. It is explanatory drawing of a big winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. It is explanatory drawing of V opening-and-closing member open pattern judging table T9. It is a flowchart of main control main processing. It is a flowchart of main side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a starting opening sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the special figure 2 prior determination processing. It is a flowchart of the special figure 1 prior determination processing. It is a flowchart of normal operation processing. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol standby processing. It is a flowchart of jackpot determination processing. It is a 1st flow chart of change pattern selection processing. It is a 2nd flow chart of change pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of processing during special symbol variation. It is a flowchart of special symbol decision processing. 6 is a flowchart of gaming state management processing. It is a flowchart of a game state reset process. It is a flowchart of special electric role processing. It is a flow chart of V opening and closing member operation processing. It is a flow chart of game state setting processing. It is a flow chart of V field sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of holding ball number processing. It is a flowchart which shows sub control main processing. It is a flowchart of sub side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of pre-reading production decision processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of a prior determination information storage area. It is explanatory drawing of pre-reading effect pattern determination table T51. It is a flow chart of change production start processing. It is an explanatory view of main production pattern decision table T52. It is explanatory drawing of a chance improvement presentation pattern determination table T53. It is a flow chart of processing during change production. It is a flowchart of display control processing. FIG. 7 is a diagram for describing an operation of the image display device 7; FIG. 7 is a diagram for describing an operation of the image display device 7; FIG. 7 is a diagram for describing an operation of the image display device 7; It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement by a movable role thing (panel movable body 15). It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement by a movable role thing (panel movable body 15). It is a figure for demonstrating pending | holding display ornamental design effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating pending | holding display decorative symbol production B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating pending | holding display ornamental design effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating pending | holding display decorative symbol production D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating pending | holding display decorative symbol production E. FIG. It is a figure for explaining fluctuation time index production A. It is a figure for explaining fluctuation time index production B. It is a figure for explaining fluctuation time index production C. It is a figure for explaining fluctuation time index production D. It is a figure for explaining fluctuation time index production E. It is a figure for demonstrating decorative symbol effect A. FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a decorative symbol effect B. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a decorative symbol effect C. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a decorative symbol effect D. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a decorative symbol effect E. It is a figure for demonstrating mode change presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating mode change presentation B. FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a mode change effect C. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a mode change effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating mode change presentation E. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating jackpot end production A. It is a figure for demonstrating jackpot end production B. It is a figure for demonstrating jackpot end production C. It is a figure for demonstrating jackpot end production D. It is a figure for demonstrating jackpot end production E. It is a figure for explaining winning a prize A. It is a figure for explaining winning a prize B. It is a figure for explaining winning a prize production C. It is a figure for explaining winning a prize D. It is a figure for explaining winning a prize production E. It is a figure for demonstrating pending | holding image display production A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating pending | holding image display production | presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating pending | holding image display production | presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating pending | holding image display production D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating pending | holding image display production E. FIG. It is a figure for explaining count production A. FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining a count effect B. It is a figure for explaining count production C. FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining a count effect D. It is a figure for explaining count production E. It is a figure which shows the modification of count production. It is a figure which shows the modification of count production. It is a figure for explaining role product interlocking display production A. It is a figure for explaining role-related interlocking display production B. FIG. 32 is a diagram for describing role-related interlocking display effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating image movement pending change presentation A. FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing an image movement hold change effect B. FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining an image movement hold change effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating image movement pending change production D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating operation corresponding | compatible operation | movement display presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating operation corresponding | compatible operation | movement display presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating operation corresponding | compatible operation | movement display presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating operation corresponding | compatible operation | movement display presentation D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating image superimposition display production A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating image superimposition display production B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating image superimposition display production C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating special pre-reading effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating special pre-reading effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating special pre-reading effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating special pre-reading effect D. It is a figure for explaining special pre-reading effect E. In addition, it is a figure for explaining the goal reach effect and the music information display effect. It is a figure for demonstrating music information display production A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating music information display production B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating music information display production C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating music information display production D. FIG. It is a figure for explaining straddle reach production A. It is a figure for explaining straddle reach production B. As shown in FIG. It is a figure for explaining straddle reach production C. Fig. 34 is a diagram for describing straddle reach effect D. It is a figure for explaining straddle reach production E. It is a figure for demonstrating a loose move effect production. It is a figure for demonstrating normal reach loss production A. It is a figure for demonstrating normal reach loss production B. It is a figure for explaining design promotion display production A. It is a figure for demonstrating symbol promotion display production B.

First Embodiment
1. Structure of gaming machine FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention. In the following, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described in agreement with the left-right direction as viewed from the player facing the gaming machine 1. Further, the forward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the gaming machine 1 to the player, and the backward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the player to the gaming machine 1.

  The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that causes a game ball to be fired based on a player's firing operation, and when the game ball is won in a specific winning device, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. is there. The gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2, and the gaming board 2 is attached to the inside of the gaming machine frame 50. In addition to the front frame (front frame portion) 53, the gaming machine frame 50 includes an outer frame (base frame portion) which forms an outer shell portion of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. Have. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertical rectangular unit disposed on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and the handle 60, the ball striking plate supply plate (upper plate) 61, and the surplus ball tray (lower plate ), A presentation button 63, a sword member 64, a sword button 65, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and a frame movable body 600. An opening is formed at the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the opening.

  The handle 60 is disposed at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and causes the game ball to be fired with a firing intensity corresponding to the rotation angle. A hit ball supply tray (upper plate) 61 is provided below the front frame 53, and stores gaming balls. The surplus ball tray (lower plate) 62 is disposed below the ball hitting supply plate (upper plate) 61, and stores gaming balls that can not be accommodated in the ball hitting supply plate 61. The effect button 63 is an operation unit disposed in the vicinity of the hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of an effect or the like to be executed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is an operation unit that simulates the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player at the time of an effect or the like that is executed along with the progress of the game. The sword button 65 is an operation unit provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 64, that is, at the end of the handle of the sword, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of presentation etc. executed as the game progresses. Ru. The sword member 64 is configured to be capable of performing two different operations of a first operation for pushing the entire sword member 64 downward and a second operation for pushing the sword button 65 at the tip. The frame lamp 66 is disposed around the opening of the front frame 53, and performs a light emission effect during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are disposed on the upper left and the upper right of the front frame 53, and provide sound effects during a game or the like. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the top of the front frame 53. The movable frame 600 is configured to be displaceable from the stored state stored inside the front frame 53 to an exposed state projecting above the front frame 53.

  The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a center decoration 10, a fixed winning device (heso) 19, and a normally variable winning device (electric chew) 22. , A gate (through chucker) 28, a first big prize device (first attacker) 31, a second big prize device (second attacker) 36, a general winning opening 27 (normal winning opening 27), and a general winning A mouth 29 (normal winning opening 29), an out mouth 16 and indicators 40 are provided.

  The game area 3 is an area where game balls fired by the operation of the handle 60 flow down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game balls are provided in a protruding manner. The rail member 4 is disposed at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game balls fired by the operation of the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is disposed on the back side of the game area 3 and emits light from the back side of the game area 3.

  The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and includes a first image display device 7A and a second image display device 7B. The first image display device 7A includes a display screen 7a. The second image display device 7B includes a display screen 7b. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. On the display screens 7a and 7b of the image display device 7, an effect symbol display area in which effect symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and a pending image in which pending images 9A and 9B are displayed It has an image display area and a reserve digested image display area where the reserve digested image 9C is displayed. The holding images 9A and 9B are images representing holding, and are also referred to as first holding icons 9A and 9B. The pending digest image 9C is an image representing the pending, and is also referred to as a second pending icon 9C. The first hold icon and the second hold icon are collectively referred to simply as a hold icon.

  The effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle" and "right". In the left symbol display area, a left effect symbol (left decorative symbol) 8L is displayed. A middle effect pattern (middle decoration pattern) 8C is displayed in the middle symbol display area. A right effect design (right decoration pattern) 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are constituted by a plurality of symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. The variation display of the rendering symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol described later. The image display device 7 is a first special symbol displayed by a first special symbol display 41a and a second special symbol display 41b described later by a combination of the effect symbols displayed in the left, middle and right symbol display areas. The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (the jackpot lottery result) can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  For example, when the jackpot is won, the production symbols are stopped and displayed with a target such as "777". In the case of an out of place, the effect pattern is stopped and displayed with a loose eye such as "637". This makes it easy for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the image display 7 in addition to the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b. The position of the symbol display area may not be fixed. Moreover, as an aspect of the variation display of the effect pattern, it may be an aspect of scrolling in the vertical direction, or may be an aspect other than that. It is not limited to the above and can be arbitrarily set as to which combination of effect symbols is to be stopped and displayed according to each lottery result. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is also referred to as "change effect of effect symbol", "change effect of decorative symbol", or simply "change effect". In addition, this variation design of the decorative symbol counts the production in a period (also referred to as a special symbol variation period) from the start of the variation of the special symbol until the stop thereof as one variation production (one cycle of variation production). Therefore, even if there is a case where the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in a period from when the special symbol starts to change until it stops, the effect of the temporary stop is included in the change effect of the decorative symbol.

  The image display device 7 can display on the display screens 7a and 7b a jackpot effect performed in parallel to the jackpot game (an example of a special game), a demonstration effect for waiting for customers, etc. in addition to the effect symbol variation effect . In the effect pattern variation effect, in addition to the effect pattern, an effect image such as a background image or a character image may be displayed. Also, the image display device 7 can indicate that the special symbol is changing or can indicate the lottery result of the special symbol in addition to the effect symbol (the fourth symbol, not shown) May be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

  The hold image display area displays a hold image 9B according to the first hold display area for displaying the hold image 9A according to the number of memories of the first special figure hold described later and the number of memories for the second special view hold described later. And a second reserved display area. By the display of the reserve images 9A and 9B, the storage number of the first special view reserve displayed on the first special view reserve display 43a described later and the second special view reserve displayed on the second special view reserve display 43b The memory number of can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player. The reserve digest image display area includes a reserve digest display area for displaying the reserve digest image 9C. The reserve digest image 9C corresponds to the effect pattern (effect pattern 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b, and the first special view reserve or the first one is displayed by the display of the reserve digest image 9C. [2] It can be displayed intelligibly for the player that the special figure reserve is digested ("special figure reserve digest" described later).

  The center decoration 10 is disposed near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7. The center decorative body 10 is attached with a movable so-called gimmick movable board 15 (also referred to as a movable board 15). At the lower part of the center decorative body 10, a stage portion 11 is formed. The stage unit 11 has a shape capable of guiding a gaming ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage unit 11 to a first starting opening 20 described later. A warp unit 12 is provided on the lower left side of the center decoration 10. The warp unit 12 includes an inlet where the gaming balls flow in and an outlet where the gaming balls flow out, and the gaming balls having flowed in from the inlet flow out to the stage 11 from the outlet.

  The fixed winning device (Heso) 19 is disposed below the image display device 7 in the gaming area 3 and the first starting opening (first starting winning opening, first entering ball) in which the ease of entering the gaming ball does not always change The mouth, the fixed start mouth) 20 is provided. The winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 20 is the trigger of the lottery of the first special symbol (big hit lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 20 is a trigger for obtaining a jackpot random number and the like, a jackpot determination, and the like.

  The normally variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is disposed below the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3 and includes a second starting opening (second starting winning opening, second entrance, variable starting opening) ing. The winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 21 is a trigger for the second special symbol lottery (big hit lottery). The electric chow 22 includes the movable member 23 in front of the second start port 21, and opens and closes the second start port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by a power chew solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). The game ball can enter the second starting opening 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state. The electric chew 22 is only required to easily enter the second start opening 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. Entry into the ball may be possible.

  The gate (through chucker) 28 is disposed above the first big prize device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3 and is configured to allow passage of the game ball. The passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is a trigger of the normal symbol lottery which determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is opened. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is a trigger for the acquisition of the normal symbol random number (the random number per hit) and the hit determination or the like.

  Here, with "lottery of special symbol", when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21, a random number for special symbol determination is acquired, and this acquired random number is determined in advance. It is the processing which judges whether it is a big hit by comparing with the value corresponding to "big hit". The lottery result of the "big hit" is not immediately notified to the player, but the variation display of the special symbol is performed in the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b described later, and the predetermined fluctuation is made. When the time has passed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a symbol matching game in which the effect symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol is performed, and the lottery result of the big hit is notified to the player more effectively by this symbol matching game.

  In addition, when the game ball passes the gate 28, “random symbol lottery” acquires a random number for ordinary symbol determination, and compares the acquired random number with a value corresponding to a predetermined “hit”. It is a process of determining whether or not a hit is made. Also about the lottery result of this normal symbol, the game ball does not just pass the gate 28 and the lottery result is not notified immediately, but the variation display of the normal symbol is performed in the ordinary symbol display 42 described later, and the predetermined fluctuation When the time has elapsed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is confirmed (turned on or off), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

  The first big prize device (the first attacker, the first special variable prize device) 31 is disposed on the upper right of the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, and the first big prize port (the first special prize port) 30 , V region 39, non-V region 70, and V opening and closing member 71. The first large winning opening 30 is provided with an opening / closing member (first special winning opening opening / closing member) 32 which permits or inhibits the reception of the game ball by the swing type opening / closing operation. The opening and closing member 32 is driven by the first big winning opening solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). In the first large winning opening 30, when the opening and closing member 32 is in the open state, the game ball can enter.

  The first big winning device 31 includes a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V area (nonspecific area) 70, and a non-V area sensor 70a (FIG. 3). The first big winning opening sensor 30a (FIG. 3), the V opening and closing member 71, and the V opening and closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3). The V area (specific area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specific area) 70 are configured as areas through which gaming balls having passed the first large winning opening 30 can pass inside the first large winning device 31 . The first large winning opening sensor 30a is disposed upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70, and detects a winning of the gaming ball to the first large winning opening 30. The V area sensor 39a is disposed in the V area 39 and detects the passage of the gaming ball to the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70 a is disposed in the non-V area 70 and detects the passage of gaming balls to the non-V area 70. The V opening and closing member 71 distributes the gaming balls having passed through the first big winning opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. The V open / close member solenoid 73 drives the V open / close member 71. The V opening and closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening and closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to In the first state (rotational state) distributed to the V area 39, when the V open / close member solenoid 73 is not energized, the second state (stop state) is positioned at the origin and distributes the gaming ball to the non-V area 70. . The V opening and closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, as long as it has a function of distributing gaming balls having passed through the first large winning opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70, for example, You may comprise so that it may move with respect to the game board 2 in the left-right direction. That is, when the V open / close member solenoid 73 is energized, the game ball is in the retracted state (first state) for distributing the gaming ball to the V area 39. When the V open / close member solenoid 73 is not energized, the game ball is distributed for non-V area 70 It may be configured to be (second state). In the gaming machine 1, passage of the gaming ball to the V area 39 is a trigger for transition to a high probability state described later. That is, the V region 39 is a positive operating hole. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 does not serve as a positive change operation opening. The first big prize device 31 of the present embodiment further includes a first big prize device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of gaming balls discharged from the first big prize device 31. The first winning device ejection sensor is provided at a point where the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 merge downstream, and counts the number of gaming balls having passed the V area sensor 39a or the non-V area sensor 70a.

  The second big winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is disposed on the upper right of the first big winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and a second big winning opening (second special winning opening) 35 Is equipped. The second big winning opening 35 is provided with an opening / closing member (second special winning opening opening / closing member, movable member) 37 which inhibits or allows the reception of the game ball by the swing type opening / closing operation. The opening and closing member 37 is driven by the second big winning opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). The game ball can enter the second large winning opening 35 when the opening and closing member 37 is in the open state.

The general winning opening 27 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3. The out port 16 is provided at the lower part of the game area 3 and discharges the game balls, which have not been won in any winning port, out of the game area 3. The indicator 40 is disposed near the center of the right side of the game board 2. Details of the indicators 40 will be described later.
The general winning opening 29 is located at the lower right of the game area 3 and adjacent to the right of the first large winning opening 30.

  The game area 3 has a left game area 3A on the left side and a right game area 3B on the right side from the center in the left-right direction. A method of hitting the game ball so that the game ball flows down is referred to as "left-hand strike". On the other hand, how to hit the game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is called "right-handed". In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for a winning to the first starting opening 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, it is configured such that winning to the gate 28, passing to the gate 28, the second starting opening 21, the first large winning opening 30, and the second large winning opening 35 can be aimed at right-handed.

  FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the displays 40. The displays 40 include a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, an ordinary symbol display 42, a first special view reserve display 43a, and a second special view reserve display 43b. , And a general drawing reserve display 44. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41 b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays an ordinary symbol. The first special view hold display 43a displays the number of stored operation reserve (first special view hold) of the first special symbol display 41a. The 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b displays the number of storage of the operation reserve (the 2nd special figure reservation) of the 2nd special symbol indicator 41b. The common drawing reserve display 44 displays the number of stored operation reserve (general drawing reserved) of the normal symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first start opening 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 21. In the following, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to as "special symbol". In addition, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are collectively referred to as "special symbol display 41". Also, the first special view hold indicator 43a and the second special view hold indicator 43b are collectively referred to as a "special view hold indicator 43".

  The special symbol display 41 variably displays (varying display) the special symbol (identification information) and then stops it to display a lottery based on the winning of the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21 (a special symbol drawing lottery , Announce the result of the jackpot lottery). The special symbols (stop symbols, special symbols derived and displayed as display results of variable display) to be stopped and displayed are one special symbol selected from among a plurality of types of special symbols by special symbol lottery. When the stop symbol is a special symbol (big hit symbol) of a predetermined big hit stop mode, the first big winning opening 30 with an open pattern according to the type of the displayed big hit symbol (type of big hit winning) displayed. Alternatively, a special game (big hit game) for opening the second big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the special winning opening (first large winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

  The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and the special symbol according to the result of the lottery per special symbol is displayed according to the lighting mode. For example, when a jackpot (one of a plurality of types of jackpots described later) is won, “○○ ●● ○○ ●●” (○: on, ●: off) and so on from the left 1, 2 , 5,6 display the jackpot symbol that the LED lights up. In the case of a loss, a loss design in which only the LED at the rightmost side is lit, such as "●●●●●●● ○", is displayed. You may employ | adopt the aspect which makes all the LED light-extinguish as a lost design. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display (variable display) of the special symbol is made over a predetermined variation time. In the aspect of the variable display, for example, each LED may be lighted so that light repeatedly flows from the left to the right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not displayed for stopping (lighting display in a specific mode), and can be any lighting mode. For example, in the variation display mode, all the LEDs may blink simultaneously.

  In the gaming machine 1, when there is a winning (entering) of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21, the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers obtained for the winning are , And is temporarily stored in the special-image storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if it is a winning to the first starting opening 20, it is stored in the first special view reservation storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as a first special view reservation, and if it is a winning to the second starting opening 21 , And is stored in the second special view reserve storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as a second special view reserve. There is an upper limit to the number of special view reservations that can be stored in each special view reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is both the first special view reservation storage area 85a and the second special view reservation storage area 85b. It is four. The special figure reservation stored in the special view reservation storage area 85 is digested when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special view reservation becomes possible. "Digestion of special figure reservation" means that a jackpot random number etc. corresponding to the special figure reservation is determined, and variable display of a special symbol for showing the determination result is performed. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21 can not be made immediately after the winning, that is, the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. Even if there is a prize during the middle game or during the execution of the special game, it is possible to reserve the right of the jackpot lottery for the prize, with the predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of special feature reservations is displayed on the special feature reservation display 43. The first special view hold indicator 43a and the second special view hold indicator 43b are each configured of, for example, four LEDs. Each special feature reservation display 43 displays the number of special feature reservations by lighting the LEDs for the number of special feature reservations.

  The variable display of the normal symbol is triggered by the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. The normal symbol display device 42 displays the normal symbol variably (variable display) and then displays it in a stop to notify the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. The normal symbols stop-displayed (a common figure stop symbol, a normal symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) are one normal symbol selected from among a plurality of types of normal symbols by normal symbol lottery. In the case where the common figure stop symbol is a predetermined specified normal symbol (a normal symbol in a predetermined stop mode, ie, a normal hit symbol), an auxiliary game for opening the second starting opening 21 in the opening pattern according to the current gaming state. Is done. The opening pattern of the second start port 21 will be described later.

  The normal symbol display device 42 is configured of two LEDs, and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the lighting mode. For example, when the lottery result is a hit, a normal hit symbol with both LEDs turned on is displayed as "○○" ((: on, ●: off). When the lottery result is a loss, a normal loss symbol in which only the right LED is lit is displayed as "● ○". You may employ | adopt the aspect which makes all the LED light-extinguish as normal loss design. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable symbol of the normal symbol is displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time. In the aspect of the variable display, for example, both LEDs may light alternately. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not displayed for stopping (lighting display in a specific mode), and can be any lighting mode. For example, in the variation display mode, all the LEDs may blink simultaneously.

  In the gaming machine 1, when there is a passage of the game ball to the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (per random number) acquired for the passage is held as a common drawing reservation in the common drawing reservation storage area 86 (FIG. 5) It is memorized once. There is an upper limit to the number of common drawing reservations that can be stored in the common drawing reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit in this embodiment is four. The general drawing reservation stored in the common drawing reservation storage area 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the common drawing reservation becomes possible. Digestion of a common drawing reserve refers to determination of a normal symbol random number (hit random number) corresponding to the common drawing reserve, and execution of variable display of a normal symbol to indicate the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 can not be made immediately after the passage, that is, winning is performed during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol or the auxiliary game. Even in the case where there is a certain number, the right of the normal symbol lottery for the passage can be reserved with the predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of common drawing reservations is displayed on the common drawing reservation display 44. The general drawing hold display 44 is constituted of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of common drawing holdings by lighting the LEDs by the number of general drawing holdings.

2. Electrical Configuration of Game Machine The electrical configuration of the game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the sub control board side of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and a voice control board 106 (FIG. 4). 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that performs control relating to the game profit such as the jackpot lottery and the transition of the game state, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub control board 90 is an effect control board that performs control regarding effects to be executed with the progress of the game, and constitutes a sub control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106. The sub control unit can be configured as long as at least the sub control substrate 90 is provided.

  The main control board 80 is provided with a game control microcomputer 81 and an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 stores a main ROM 83 storing a program for controlling the progress of a game, a main RAM 84 used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 executing a program stored in the main ROM 83. It contains. Details of data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of storage areas provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 87. The input / output circuit 87 may be incorporated in the game control microcomputer 81.

  Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87 and a relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives signals output from the sensors and outputs signals to the solenoids. The sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the first start opening sensor 20a, the second start opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first large winning opening sensor 30a, the second large winning opening sensor 35a, and the V region A sensor 39a, a non-V area sensor 70a, and a normal winning opening sensor 27a, 29a are illustrated. As the solenoids connected via the relay substrate 88, the electric chew solenoid 24, the first large winning opening solenoid 33, the second large winning opening solenoid 38, and the V open / close member solenoid 73 are exemplified. The first starting opening sensor 20 a is provided in the inside of the first starting opening 20, and detects a game ball winning the first starting opening 20. The second starting opening sensor 21 a is provided inside the second starting opening 21 and detects a gaming ball that has won a prize in the second starting opening 21. The gate sensor 28 a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects the gaming ball having passed through the gate 28. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects gaming balls that have won the first large winning opening 30. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is provided inside the second large winning opening 35, and detects a game ball winning in the second large winning opening 35. The V area sensor 39a is provided in the V area 39 in the inside of the first big winning opening 30, and detects gaming balls that have passed through the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is provided in the non-V area 70 inside the first big winning opening 30, and detects gaming balls having passed through the non-V area 70. The normal winning opening sensor 27a is provided inside the normal winning opening 27, and detects a game ball that has won the normal winning opening 27. The normal winning opening sensor 29a detects the gaming ball that has passed through the inside of the normal winning opening 29. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first large winning opening solenoid 33 drives the open / close member 32 of the first large winning device 31. The second large winning opening solenoid 38 drives the open / close member 37 of the second large winning device 36. The V open / close member solenoid 73 drives the V open / close member 71 of the first big winning device 31.

  Indicators 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 has a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special view hold indicator 43a, a second special view hold indicator 43b, a general drawing hold Display control of the display 44 is performed.

  A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives a signal from the payout control board 110 for dispensing monitoring. The payout control substrate 110 is connected to the winning ball dispenser 120, the rental ball dispenser 130, and the card unit 135, and the launcher 112 is connected via the launch control circuit 111. The prize ball dispensing device 120 dispenses a prize ball. The payout control board 110 drives the winning ball motor 121 of the winning ball payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out the winning balls. The prize balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The rental ball payout device 130 pays out the rental balls. The payout control board 110 drives the rental ball motor 131 of the rental ball payout device 130 based on a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1 to pay out the rental balls. The lent balls to be paid out are detected by the lent ball sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is disposed adjacent to the gaming machine 1 and outputs information related to the ball lending based on the information such as the inserted prepaid card. The launcher 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a launch motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a launch volume 115. The launch device 112 detects a touch of the handle 60 by the touch switch 114 when the player operates the handle 60, and detects an amount of rotation of the handle 60 by the launch volume 115. Then, the firing motor 113 is driven so that the gaming ball is fired with a strength according to the magnitude of the detection signal of the firing volume 115.

  A sub control board 90 (FIG. 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection in which only transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 is possible. That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90, a not-shown unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) as a communication direction control means is interposed.

  The sub control board 90 includes a presentation control microcomputer 91 and an input / output circuit 95. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub control board 90, and controls the effect of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a sub ROM 93 for storing a program for controlling effects as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 used as a work memory, and a sub for executing the programs stored in the sub ROM 93. And the CPU 92. Details of data stored in sub ROM 93 and details of storage areas provided in sub RAM 94 will be described later. Sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another substrate via the input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 91. An image control board 100, an audio control board 106, a lamp control board 107, and a relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via an input / output circuit 95.

  The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and performs display control of the image display 7 (the first image display 7A and the second image display 7B) according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In the ROM 103, in addition to a program for performing display control, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. Image data such as a background image etc. is stored. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding image data. The CPU 102 executes a program stored in the ROM 103. The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to perform display control of the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on an instruction from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

  The speaker 67 is connected to the voice control board 106, and the effect control microcomputer 91 receives voice, music, sound effects from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. And so on. Sound data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. The voice control board 106 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and may cause the CPU to execute voice control based on a command. Further, the voice control board 106 may mount a ROM, and may store sound data in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 to cause the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 to execute voice control. Furthermore, sound data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

  A frame lamp 66, a board lamp 5, and a board movable body 15 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and control them. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs lighting control of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80. That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (also referred to as data for determining lighting / extinguishing, light emission color, etc., lamp data) for determining the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5. The light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control substrate 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the board movable body 15 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The movable board 15 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the center decoration 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of the panel movable body 15, and controls the operation of the panel movable body 15 in accordance with the operation pattern data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and may cause the CPU to execute the lighting control of the lamp based on the command and the operation control of the movable board 15. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a ROM, and the ROM may store data on the light emission pattern and the operation pattern.

  The effect button detection switch 63 a and the frame movable body 600 are connected to the relay substrate 108. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63 a to the sub control substrate 90 via the relay substrate 108. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the frame movable body 600 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the top of the front frame 53 (FIG. 1). The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of the frame movable body 600, and controls the operation of the frame movable body 600 according to the operation pattern data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create operation pattern data. The relay substrate 108 is provided with a select button detection switch for detecting that the select button 68 (FIG. 1) has been pressed, a touch sensor provided on the front frame 53, and outputting a detection signal when a human body comes in contact. It may be connected.

3. Data Configuration of Gaming Machine The data configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described based on FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. As shown in FIG. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 6A is a diagram for describing a table stored in sub ROM 93. Referring to FIG. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in sub RAM 94. Referring to FIG.

  In the main ROM 83 (FIG. 5A), a big hit determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a big hit type determination table T5, and a variation pattern A determination table T6, a power chew open pattern determination table T7, a special winning opening open pattern determination table T8, and a V open / close member open pattern determination table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in main control main processing (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific content of each determination table will be described later.

  The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5B) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special view reserve storage area 85, and a common view reserve storage An area 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which a command output from the main control unit to the sub control unit in the main control main process (described later) is set (output buffer). A change start command, a change stop command, an opening command, a round specification command, an ending command, a game state specification command, a V passage command, a customer wait standby command, etc. are set. The flag setting area 84b is an area in which a flag indicating the state of the gaming machine or the gaming state is set in the main control main process (described later), and the jackpot flag, jackpot end flag, first winning flag, second winning flag, The V flag, the probability change flag, the time saving flag, etc. are set. The counter setting area 84c is an area where a counter used in the main control main process (described later) is set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a probability variation counter, a time reduction counter, and the like are set. The special operation status set area 84 d is an area in which the status in the special operation process described later is set. Special feature reserve storage area 85 includes a first special feature reserve storage area 85a in which a first special feature reserve is stored, and a second special feature reserve storage area 85b in which a second special feature reserve is stored. In the first special view reserve storage area 85a, a random number value group (reserve information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to each of the first, second, third and fourth special reserve for the first special figure reserve. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area for storing are provided. A first special-image retention storage area 85b is used to store a first random number group (retention information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth second special-image retentions. A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The common drawing reservation storage area 86 stores a random number value group (holding information) such as a common symbol random number (per random number) corresponding to each of the first, second, third and fourth common drawing reservations. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. In the main RAM 84, in addition to the above-mentioned area, a drive for setting a hit type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, drive data for driving the panel movable body 15 and the frame movable body 600, and the like. A data buffer or the like is provided.

  The sub ROM 93 (FIG. 6A) stores a pre-reading effect pattern determination table T51, a core effect pattern determination table T52, a chance-up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. . These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in sub control main processing (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. The specific content of each determination table will be described later.

  The sub RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, a rendering command set area 94b, a prior determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which a command input from the main control unit side is stored in the sub control main process (described later), and the a priori determination command, the hold ball number command, the change start command, and the change A stop command, an opening command, a round designating command, an ending command, a game state designating command, a V passing command, a customer waiting standby command and the like are stored. The effect command set area 94 b is an area where commands output from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are set in sub control main processing (described later) An output buffer), and a change production start command, a change end command, a change production end command, an opening production start command, a round production start command, an ending production start command, etc. are set. The prior determination information storage area 94c stores prior determination information in the sub control main process (described later). The counter setting area 94d is an area where counters used in sub control main processing (described later) are set, and a random number counter, a first special view hold effect counter, a second special view hold effect counter, and a common view hold effect counter A probability variation effect counter, a time reduction effect counter, etc. are set.

  FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. FIG. 7A shows the random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and FIG. 7B shows the random numbers acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control unit side. There is. The gaming control microcomputer 81 acquires “big hit random number”, “big hit type random number”, “reach random number”, “variation pattern random number”, and “normal symbol random number (hit random number)” at a timing described later. Is configured as. The “big hit random number” is a random number used for a lottery for deciding whether or not a big hit (big hit determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The “big hit type random number” is a random number used for lottery of the type of the big hit that has won (big hit type determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether to generate a reach in the effect design variation effect indicating the result when the big hit determination is a loss, and the value in the range of 0 to 127 Take The reach is a state in which one of the plurality of effect symbols (decorative symbols) that are variably displayed among the effect symbols (decorative symbols) is left, and depending on which symbol the variably displayed effect symbols are stopped and displayed It is a state (for example, the state of "7 7 7") which becomes combination of the production design which shows jackpot winning. In addition, the effect pattern stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if it is shaking in the display screen 7a. The “variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including a variation time, and has a value in the range of 0 to 127. The “normal symbol random number (hit random number)” is used for a lottery (normal symbol lottery) as to whether or not to play an auxiliary game to open the electric chew 22. Normal symbol random numbers take values in the range of 0-255. The “big hit random number”, the “big hit type random number”, the “reach random number”, and the “variation pattern random number” are acquired based on the entry into the starting opening (the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21). The random number value group acquired based on the entry to the first starting opening 20 is stored in the first special view reservation storage area 85a, and the random number value group acquired based on the entry to the second opening 21 is It is stored in the second special view reserve storage area 85b. The “normal symbol random number (per random number)” is obtained based on the passage of the gate 28. The acquired normal symbol random number value is stored in the common drawing reserve storage area 86.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire the “pre-read effect random number” and the “chance up random number” at timings described later. "Pre-read effect random number" is a random number used to determine pre-read effect at the time of change effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The “chance up random number” is a random number used to determine the chance up performance at the time of the change performance, and takes a value ranging from 0 to 127. The “prediction effect random number” is acquired based on the output of the prior determination command from the main control unit to the sub control unit. The acquired random number value group is stored in the sub RAM 94. The “chance up random number” is acquired based on the output of the change start command from the main control unit to the sub control unit. The acquired random value is stored in the sub RAM 94.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. 8 (A) shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8 (B) shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. 8 (C) shows it. Is a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit determination table T3, and FIG. 8 (D) is a diagram for explaining the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4.

  The jackpot determination table T1 determines whether the jackpot random number value (one of 0 to 65535) acquired by the gaming control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "big hit" or "losing". It is a table referred to for determination. In FIG. 8A, in the “normal probability state”, when the jackpot random number value is “0 to 164”, it is determined to be “jackpot”, and the jackpot random number value is “numerical value other than 0 to 164 (165 to 65535 In the case of “)”, it is indicated that it is determined as “lost”. Also, in the "high probability state", if the jackpot random number value is "0 to 649", it is determined to be "jackpot", and the jackpot random number value is "numerical value other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)" Is shown to be determined as "loss". The contents of the “normal probability state” and the “high probability state” will be described later.

  In the reach determination table T2, in the main control main process (described later) of the gaming control microcomputer 81, whether the reach random number value (one of 0 to 127) acquired corresponds to "reach" or "reach not". Is a table referenced to determine whether In FIG. 8B, when the reach random number is "0 to 13" in the "non-time-saving state", it is determined that "reach is present", and the reach random value is "numerical value other than 0 to 13 (14 to In the case of “127)”, it is indicated that “no reach” is determined. Further, in the “time saving state”, when the reach random number value is “0 to 5”, it is determined that “reach exists”, and the reach random number value is “numerical value other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)”. Is shown to be determined as "no reach". The contents of the "time saving state" and the "non-time saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, in the time saving state, the reach at the time of losing is less likely to be applied than in the non-time saving state. This is to speed up the speed of digesting the Tokusou reserve by selecting more reachless losses with short fluctuation time in the short time state.

  The normal symbol winning determination table T3 corresponds to whether the normal symbol random number value (one of 0 to 255) acquired by the gaming control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) corresponds to "hit" or "lost". It is a table referenced to determine whether to In FIG. 8C, in the "non-time-saving state", when the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 2", it is determined as "hit", and the normal symbol random number value is "numerical value other than 0 to 2 (3 In the case of "255", it is shown that it is judged as "lost". Also, in the "time saving state", if the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 254", it is determined as "hit", and if the normal symbol random number value is "numerical value other than 0 to 254 (255)" It is shown that it is judged as "missing".

  The normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 determines how many seconds the variation period of the normal symbol is in accordance with the gaming state (non-time-short status or time-short status) in the main control main processing (described later). Is a table that is referenced to In (D) of FIG. 8, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined to be “30 seconds” in the “non-short time state”, and the variation time of the normal symbol is determined to be “1 second” in the “time reduction state” It is shown.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. In the jackpot type determination table T5, according to the jackpot type random number value (one of 0 to 127) acquired by the gaming control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later), "class of jackpot" and "special symbol of It is a table referenced to determine the type. In FIG. 9, when winning in the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery, if the jackpot type random number value is "0 to 24", it is determined that the jackpot type is "16 RV passage planned jackpot", special figure The stop symbol of 1 (special stop symbol) is determined to be "big hit symbol 1". When the jackpot type random number value is "25 to 49", it is determined that the jackpot type is "16 RV passage planned jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 2". When the jackpot type random number value is "50 to 55", it is determined that the jackpot type is "16R (substantially 15R) V scheduled to pass through jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 3". When the jackpot type random number value is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (essentially 13R) V scheduled to pass through jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 4". When the jackpot type random number value is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (essentially 13R) V non-scheduled scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 5". On the other hand, when winning in the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery, regardless of the jackpot classification random value (any one of 0 to 127), jackpot classification is determined to be "16 RV passage scheduled jackpot", It is shown that the stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) of the special figure 2 is determined to be "big hit symbol 1". In addition, by referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, the "special figure stop symbol data" corresponding to the special view stop symbol, the "opening (OP) command" of the special game, the "round designated command", the "ending (ED) Commands can also be identified. For specific contents of "16 RV passing jackpot", "16R (15R substantial) V passing jackpot", "16R (real 13R) V scheduled jacking" and "16R (real 13R) V non-passing jackpot" I will mention later.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the non-short time state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. The variation pattern determination table T6 is a table referred to by the gaming control microcomputer 81 for determining a variation pattern according to the acquired variation pattern random number value (0 to 127) in the main control main process (described later). . In FIG. 10, for example, the first starting opening 20 is won in the non-short time state, and it is determined as "lost" in the big hit determination table T1, and determined as "reach" in the reach determination table T2, and the number of holding balls is "1. When the variation pattern random number value is “0 to 60”, it is shown that the variation pattern is determined to be “P7”. In FIG. 11, for example, the second start hole 21 wins in a time saving state, is determined as "big hit" in the big hit determination table T1, is determined as "16 RV passing planned big hit" in the big hit type determination table T5, fluctuation pattern random value It is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P61" when "is 0 to 10". As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, once the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. Also, when reaching, it is also determined whether the reach will be a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach effect where the fluctuation time after reach is longer than normal reach. Here, three types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3) having different fluctuation times are set. The length of the fluctuation time is SP3> SP2> SP1. In SP1 to 3, it is evolved through normal reach. The difference between SP1 and SP3 may be, for example, the presence or absence of a pseudo run.

  FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric chew release pattern determination table T7. The electric chew open pattern determination table T7 is used by the gaming control microcomputer 81 to determine the open pattern of the electric chew 22 in accordance with the gaming state (non-short time state or short time state) in the main control main process (described later). It is a table to be referenced. In FIG. 12A, the open pattern of the electric chow 22 is determined to be "open pattern 11" in the "non-short time state", and the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 12" in the "time short state". It is shown. The contents of the release pattern 11 and the release pattern 12 are shown in FIG. In the opening pattern 11, the opening operation is performed once and the opening time 0.2 second is released. In the opening pattern 12, the number of times of opening is three, the opening time per one time is 2.0 seconds, and the interval (opening interval) of 1.0 second is performed. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains if there is a predetermined number of game ball winnings (prescribed number of winnings, maximum 10).

  FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the special winning opening open pattern determination table T8. In the special winning opening open pattern determination table T8, the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening according to the special view stop symbol data (FIG. 9) in the main control main processing (described later) of the gaming control microcomputer 81. It is a table referenced to determine the 35 open patterns. In FIG. 13A, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35 is "open pattern 21. When the special pattern stop symbol data is "14H" or "15H", the open pattern is determined as "open pattern 22". When the special pattern stop symbol data is "13H", the open pattern is "open". It is shown that the pattern 23 "is determined. FIG. 13B shows the contents of the release pattern 21, the release pattern 22 and the release pattern 23. The opening pattern 21 opens the first large winning opening 30 once for opening times 1 to 29.5 seconds (long opening) at opening times 1 to 13 and 15th, and opening times 1 to 14 times for opening 16th. The second big winning opening 35 is opened (long open) with an open time of 29.5 seconds. The opening pattern 22 opens the first big winning opening 30 (long opening) with the opening number of once and opening time of 29.5 seconds in the 1st to 13th eyes, and in the 14th and 16th eyes, the number of opening once, the opening time The second big winning opening 35 of 0.1 second is opened (short opening), and the opening number of the first big winning opening 30 of 0.1 second is opened (short opening) once at the 15th opening. . The opening pattern 23 opens the first large winning opening 30 (long opening) once for the opening times 1 to 29.5 seconds in the 1st to 13th and 15th eyes, and opens once for the opening number 14th. The second big winning opening 35 of 0.1 second is opened (short open), and the opening number of the second big winning opening 35 of 29.5 seconds is opened (long open) once at the opening frequency of 16R. . However, opening of the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35, even if there is a predetermined number of game ball winning (predetermined number of winning, maximum 9), even if the opening time remains It is closed.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V open / close member open pattern determination table T9. The V open / close member open pattern determination table T9 is for the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the open pattern of the V open / close member 71 according to the special view stop symbol data (FIG. 9) in the main control main process (described later). It is a table to be referenced. In FIG. 14A, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H" or "21H", the open pattern of the V open / close member 71 is determined to be "open pattern 31" and the special figure stop symbol When the data is "13H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 32", and when the special view stop symbol data is "14H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 33" and the special view stop symbol data is When "15H", it is shown that the release pattern is determined to be "release pattern 34". The contents of the open pattern 31, the open pattern 32, the open pattern 33, and the open pattern 34 are shown in FIG. 14 (B). In the opening pattern 31, the second opening of the V opening and closing member 71 is performed for an opening time of 0.1 second when the first winning opening 30 has a first winning at the second, fourth, sixth, and eighth Rs. In 10th and 12th R, when there is the first winning of the first big winning opening 30, the V open / close member 71 is opened for a short of 0.1 second, and when there is the second winning the opening time The V open / close member 71 is opened long for up to 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, at the second, fourth, sixth, and 12th eyes, when the first large winning opening 30 has a first winning, the V open / close member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 second. In the 8th and 10th eyes, when the first winning combination 30 has the first winning, the V open / close member 71 is opened for a short of 0.1 second, and when the second winning is found the opening time The V open / close member 71 is opened long for up to 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, when there is the first winning on the first big winning opening 30 at the second and sixth R eyes, the V open / close member 71 is opened for a short of 0.1 seconds for the opening time, and there is the second winning. When this is done, the V open / close member 71 is opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. At the fourth, eighth, tenth, and twelfth Rs, when the first large winning opening 30 has a first winning, the V open / close member 71 is short-opened for an open time of 0.1 second. In the opening pattern 34, at the second, fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth, and twelfth R, when the first large winning opening 30 has the first winning, the V open / close member 71 is opened for a short of 0.1 second. .

4. Description of jackpot, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "jackpot" and "loss" as a result of a jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of "missing", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 41. When the jackpot is won, the jackpot game is made to open the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) with the opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol (the type of big hitting) stopped and displayed. Is executed. The jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit opening game), an opening (OP) before the first round game is started, and an ending (ED) after the final round game is over There is. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the winning opening during the round game is included in the opening round game before the closing.

  There are several types of jackpots. The type of jackpot is as shown in FIG. Here, there are two major types of jackpots, "V passing scheduled jackpot" and "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". "V passing scheduled jackpot" operates the opening and closing member 32, the opening and closing member 37, and the V opening and closing member 71 in an opening pattern (V passage expected opening pattern) which allows passage of gaming balls to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. It is a jackpot. Here, the jackpot of special figure stop symbol data 11H-14H and 21H corresponds to "V passing scheduled jackpot". The combination of the opening pattern of the opening and closing member 32 and the opening and closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (open pattern 21: open pattern 31), (open pattern 22: open pattern 33). Or (open pattern 23: open pattern 32), it is possible to pass the gaming ball to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. The "V non-passing planned jackpot" is an opening pattern (V non-passing planned opening pattern) in which passage of the gaming ball to the V area 39 is impossible during the jackpot game, the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37 and the V opening / closing member 71 Is a jackpot to operate. Here, the jackpot of the special figure stop symbol data 17H corresponds to "V non-passing planned jackpot". When the combination of the open pattern of the open / close member 32 and the open / close member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the open pattern of the V open / close member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (open pattern 22: open pattern 34) Passage of the game ball to 39 becomes impossible. As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 doubles as the V-passing planned opening pattern and the V-non-passing planned opening pattern.

  "V passing scheduled jackpot" includes "16 RV passing scheduled jackpot", "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot", and "16R (substantially 15R) V scheduled passing jackpot". The "16 RV scheduled jackpot" has a substantial total number of rounds of 16R. 1R to 13R and 15R open the first large winning opening 30 for up to 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second large winning opening 35 for up to 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and passage to the V area 39 in the first large winning opening 30 is easily possible.

  Although "16R (essentially 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, a substantial total number of rounds is 13R. That is, 1R to 13R opens the first large winning opening 30 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but 15R only opens the first large winning opening 30 for 0.1 second per 1R, and 14R and Even in the 16R, the second large winning opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 second per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 13R) V scheduled scheduled jackpot", the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short from 14R to 16R, and it is a round in which the winning ball can not be expected. That is, "16R (essentially 13R) V passing planned jackpot" is a jackpot of substantially 13R. In 2R and 6R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33), and passage to the V area 39 in the first large winning opening 30 is easily possible.

  Although "16R (15R real) V scheduled jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, a substantial total number of rounds is 15R. That is, 1R to 13R and 15R open the first large winning opening 30 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, 16R open the second large winning opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but 14R The second large winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1 R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 15R) V passing scheduled jackpot", the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short, and it becomes an unforeseeable round of winning balls. That is, "16R (15R in real) V scheduled jackpot" is a jackpot in 15R. In 8R and 10R, the V open / close member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: open pattern 32), and passage to the V area 39 in the first large winning opening 30 is easily possible.

  The "V non-passing jackpot" is the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot" of the opening pattern 22 having a total number of rounds of 16R but a substantial total number of rounds of 13. That is, 1R to 13R opens the first large winning opening 30 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but 15R only opens the first large winning opening 30 for 0.1 second per 1R, and 14R and Even in the 16R, the second large winning opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 second per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (effective 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot", the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short from 14R to 16R, and it becomes an unforeseeable round of winning balls. That is, "16R (13R substantially) V non-passing planned jackpot" is a jackpot of 13R substantially. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, although the V open / close member 71 is open, the open is short open (FIG. 14: open pattern 34) and the V area 39 in the first large winning opening 30 It is almost impossible for game balls to pass.

  As is clear from the above description, "16R (essentially 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (actually 13R) V scheduled planned jackpot" are the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35 The open patterns of the open / close member 32 and the open / close member 37) are the same (open pattern 22), and only the open pattern of the V open / close member 71 is different (open pattern 34 and open pattern 33). That is, it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 in the first large winning opening 30 in "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot", and the gaming state after the jackpot is It becomes a low probability time short state (low probability high base state). On the other hand, “16R (actually 13R) V scheduled to pass the jackpot” allows the game ball to easily pass to the V area 39 in the first large winning opening 30, and the gaming state after the jackpot is highly probable It becomes time saving state (high probability high base state). From this, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between "16R (essentially 13R) V non-passable jackpot" and "16R (essentially 13R) V scheduled planned jackpot", and the gaming state after that jackpot is low certainty It becomes difficult to determine whether the time saving state (low probability high base state) or high probability time short state (high probability high base state) is reached. In other words, the gaming state after “16R (actually 13R) V scheduled to pass the jackpot” is a high probability time short state (high probability high base state when the gaming ball passes through the V area 39 in the first large winning opening 30 However, it is a latent state (a latent probability change state) that the probability is high.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 9, the distribution ratio of the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 68/128 (approximately 53%) for V-passing planned jackpot and 60/60 for V-not scheduled planned jackpot. It is 128 (about 47%). On the other hand, jackpots won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are all V passage scheduled jackpots. That is, when the jackpot is won by the lottery based on the winning of the second starting port 21 which can be entered by execution of the electric support control described later, it is always the V-passing scheduled jackpot. As described above, in the gaming machine 1, the jackpot performed with the game ball in the second starting port 21 is performed rather than the jackpot lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) performed with the game ball in the first starting port 20. The lottery (the second special symbol lottery) is set to be advantageous to the player.

5. Description of gaming state The gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability fluctuation control" and "variation time reduction control" for the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 42, respectively. It is. Here, a state in which the game control microcomputer 81 performs probability fluctuation control on the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is called “high probability state”, and a state in which probability fluctuation control is not performed is simply referred to as “normal probability state ( Non-high probability state, low probability state) The game control microcomputer 81 uses the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be a jackpot is higher in the high probability state than the normal probability state as the probability variation control of the special symbol. The high probability state is realized by performing the jackpot determination. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher probability of jackpot than the normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability variation control on the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol indicator 41 is used as compared with the case where probability variation control is not executed. There is a high probability that the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the special symbol will be a big hit symbol.

  In addition, the state where microcomputer 81 for game control controls the fluctuation time shortening control to the special symbol of special symbol indicator 41 is called “time saving state”, the state where fluctuation time shortening control is not performed is simply “non time saving state”. It is said. In the time saving state, the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of variation display to the time of derivation display of the display result) is shorter than the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 uses the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10, FIG. 11) determined so that selection of a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is more frequent than in the non-time-short state when in the time saving state. The variation pattern used is judged. That is, when the microcomputer 81 for game control is executing the fluctuation time shortening control on the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol can be varied as compared to the case where the fluctuation time shortening control is not executed. It becomes easy to select short fluctuation time as fluctuation time of display. As a result, in the time saving state, the pace of the special figure reserve is increased, and a valid winning to the starting opening (a prize that can be stored as the special figure reserve) is easily generated. Thereby, it is possible to aim for a jackpot under the progress of the smooth game. The game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute probability variation control and variation time reduction control on the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 or may execute only one of them.

  The game control microcomputer 81 executes probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with fluctuation time reduction control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41. That is, the gaming control microcomputer 81 executes probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control on the normal symbol in the case of the time saving state and does not execute it in the non-time shortening state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines the number of normal symbol random number values (hit random number values) determined to be successful as the probability variation control of the normal symbol per unit regular symbol per shot determination table T3 in which the time saving state is larger than the non time saving state. Hit determination (normal symbol determination) is performed using FIG. 8 (C). Therefore, in the time saving state, the hit probability is higher than that of the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability fluctuation control on the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the normal symbol display 42 is used compared to the case where probability fluctuation control is not executed. The display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the normal symbol hits and the probability of becoming a symbol increases. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than the non-time saving state. Here, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time-short state, but is 1 second in the time-short state (FIG. 8 (D)). Furthermore, in the time saving state, the open time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time short state (FIG. 12). That is, the gaming control microcomputer 81 executes open time extension control on the electric chew 22. In addition, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening the power chew 22 in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the gaming control microcomputer 81 executes the opening count increase control on the power chew 22. Under circumstances where the gaming control microcomputer 81 is executing probability variation control and variation time reduction control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 and open time extension control and opening number increase control for the electric chew 22, As compared with the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the gaming ball is more frequently won in the second starting opening 21. As a result, the base which is the ratio of the number of winning balls to the number of firing balls becomes high. Therefore, a state in which these controls are being executed is called a "high base state", and a state not being executed is called a "low base state". In the high base state, it is possible to aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls on hand. The high base state is a state in which so-called power supply control (control for supporting the winning of the second starting port 21 by the power control 22) is being executed. The high base state (power support control state) may not perform all the control described above. That is, among the probability fluctuation control for the ordinary symbol of the ordinary symbol display 42, the fluctuation time shortening control for the ordinary symbol of the ordinary symbol display 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the opening frequency increasing control for the elective chew 22 By performing one or more controls, it is only necessary that the electric tube 22 be more easily released than when the controls are not being executed. Further, the high base state (power support control state) may be controlled independently without being associated with the short time state.

  In gaming machine 1, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning to V passing scheduled jackpot is a high probability state and time saving state and high base state if passage to V area 39 is made during the jackpot game . This gaming state is particularly referred to as "high probability high base state" or "high probability time short state". The high-accuracy high-base state ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 160 times), or the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. In addition, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning to the V non-scheduled scheduled jackpot, if the passage of V area 39 has not been made during the jackpot game (almost not done), normal probability state (non-high probability States (low probability states) and short and high base states. This gaming state is particularly referred to as "low probability high base state", "low probability time short state". The low probability high base state is ended by the variable display of the special symbol a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times) being executed, or the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. When the gaming machine 1 is played for the first time, the gaming state after the power is turned on is the normal probability state, the non-time-short state and the low base state (non-power-supply control state). This gaming state is particularly called "low probability low base state". The low probability low base state may be referred to as "normal gaming state" or "low probability non-short state (also referred to simply as non-short state)". In addition, the state during the execution of the special game (big hit game) is referred to as "special game state (big hit game state)". Furthermore, a state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state is referred to as a "specific gaming state".

  In a high base state such as a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously if the game ball is made to enter the right gaming area 3B (FIG. 1) by right hitting. The electric support 22 makes it easier to open the electric chew 22 compared to the low base state, and the second start opening 21 is easier to win than the first start opening 20. is there. From this, in the high base state, the game ball is passed to the gate 28 serving as a trigger for the normal symbol lottery, and the right strike is performed to win the game ball to the second starting opening 21. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of start winnings (winnings on the starting opening) rather than hitting the left. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the game is played by hitting the right even during the big hit game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously if the game ball is made to enter the left gaming area 3A (FIG. 1) by left hitting. Since the power support control is not executed, the power chew 22 is less likely to be released compared to the high base state, and it is easier to win the first start opening 20 than to the second start opening 21. It is because it has become. From this, in the low base state, in order to win the game ball to the first starting opening 20, the left strike is performed. This makes it possible to obtain a large number of starting winnings rather than right-handed.

6. Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. A counter, a flag, a status, a buffer and the like appearing in the operation explanation of the gaming control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the pass / fail judgment means (FIG. 23) and the pass / fail judgment means (FIG. 18, FIG. 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the main control main process. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the gaming control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83. Main Control In the main processing, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first performs initial setting (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, setting of the main CPU 82, resetting of various flags, status, counters and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The initial setting is performed only once after the power is turned on, and is not performed thereafter.

  After the initial setting, the gaming control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interruption of the interruption process (step S002), and performs the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (step S003). In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 is configured to receive various random number counter values (big hit random number, big hit type random number value, reach random number value, variation pattern random value) shown in FIG. , Normal symbol random number value) is added 1 and updated. Each random number counter value is returned to "0" and added again when the set upper limit value is reached. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0”, or may be randomly changed. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

  After the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 permits an interrupt of the interrupt process (step S004). While the interrupt is permitted, execution of the main timer interrupt process (step S005) is possible. The main timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec cycle). That is, the main timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec cycle). Then, after the end of the main timer interrupt processing, before the start of the main timer interrupt processing next time, the update processing of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing is repeatedly executed. . When an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt process is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main timer interrupt process (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first performs a random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 updates the various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7A. This random number updating process is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process performed in the above-described main control main process (FIG. 15). That is, the update process of various random number counter values is the execution period of the main timer interrupt process and the other period (period from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process) And both.

  After the random number update process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1 and outputs payout data for the payout of a prize ball according to the type of winning opening to the main RAM 84. Set in buffer. The various sensors include, for example, the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the first large winning opening sensor 30a, the second large winning opening sensor 35a, the normal winning opening sensor 27a, and the normal winning opening sensor 29a (see FIG. 3).

  After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the start opening sensor detection process (step S103), the normal operation process (step S104), the special operation process (step S105), the V area sensor detection process (step S106), the holding ball The number process (step S107) is sequentially performed. Details of these processes will be described later. After the holding ball number process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs an output process (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs a command or the like set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each process described above to the sub control board 90. After the output processing, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs other processing (step S109). In the other processing, for example, the second special view suspension indicator 43b is controlled to the display mode indicating the number based on the special diagram 2 suspension ball number described later, and the first special diagram is based on the special view 1 suspension ball number The hold indicator 43a is controlled to a display mode indicating the number.

[Starting mouth sensor detection processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). The gaming control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the gaming ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is performed based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the gaming ball passes the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of normal symbol holding balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S202). The number of normal symbol holding balls is the number of common drawing holdings, and more specifically, is the value of a counter for counting the number of common drawing holdings provided in the main RAM 84. If the normal symbol holding ball number is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. If the normal symbol holding ball number is "3" or less (step S202: NO), "1" is added to the normal symbol holding ball number (step S203), and then a normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the gaming control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of the label-TRND-H), and the acquired random number is selected from the first to the first general drawing reserve storage area 86 of the main RAM 84. The fourth storage area is stored in a storage area corresponding to the current number of normal symbol holding balls.

  In step S205, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the gaming ball has won in the second starting opening 21. This determination is performed depending on whether or not the gaming ball has been detected by the second starting opening sensor 21a. If the gaming ball has not won in the second starting opening 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. If the gaming ball has won (step S205: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the special figure 2 holding ball number is "4 (upper limit)" (step S206). The special figure 2 holding ball number is the number of second special figure reservations, more specifically, the value of a counter for counting the number of second special figure reservations provided in the main RAM 84. If the special figure 2 reservation sphere number is "4" (Step S206: YES), processing will skip to Step S210. When special figure 2 reservation sphere number is below 3 (step S206: NO), after adding 1 to special figure 2 retention sphere number (step S207), special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing is done (step S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of label-TRND-A), the value of jackpot type random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of label-TRND-AS), the value of reach random number counter (FIG. 7: label -TRND-value of RC), value of fluctuation pattern random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-T1) is acquired. The gaming control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group out of the first to fourth storage areas of the second special view storage area 85b in a storage area corresponding to the current special map 2 storage ball count. The gaming control microcomputer 81 temporarily suspends the acquired random number value group also to a buffer (prejudging buffer for pre-judging) different from the second special-character drawing storage area 85b for the special drawing 2 prior determination processing (FIG. 18) described later. To remember (hold). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 2 prior determination process (step S209). The details of the special view 2 prior determination process will be described later.

  In step S210, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the gaming ball has won in the first starting opening 20. This determination is made based on whether or not the gaming ball has been detected by the first starting opening sensor 20a. If the gaming ball has not won in the first starting opening 20 (step S210: NO), this processing ends. When the game ball is won in the first starting opening 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special figure 1 holding ball number is "4 (upper limit value)" ( Step S211). The special figure 1 holding ball number is the number of first special figure holdings, and more specifically, is the value of a counter for counting the number of first special drawing holdings provided in the main RAM 84. If the special figure 1 holding ball number is "4" (step S211: YES), this processing ends. When the special figure 1 holding ball number is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the special figure 1 holding ball number (step S212), special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S2) S213). Here, the value of the big hit random number counter, the value of the big hit type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the variation pattern random number counter are obtained in the same manner as the special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (step S208). The gaming control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group out of the first to fourth storage areas of the first special view storage area 85a in the storage area corresponding to the current special view 1 suspension ball count. The gaming control microcomputer 81 temporarily suspends the acquired random number value group also to a buffer (prejudging buffer for pre-judging) different from the first special-character drawing storage area 85a for the special drawing 1 prior determination process (FIG. 19) described later. To remember (hold). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 1 advance determination process (step S214). The details of the special view 1 prior determination process will be described later.

[Special figure 2 prior judgment processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special view 2 prior determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). First, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the probability change flag is ON (step S301). If the probability change flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is OFF, the predetermination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is ON, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot prior determination with reference to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the prior determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). Do. Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 uses the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to be referred to and the jackpot random number value to determine in advance whether or not a jackpot has occurred. Here, since the high probability state (probability change flag is ON), the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the high probability state table (big hit determination value “0” to “649”) in the big hit determination table T1. Determine in advance whether it is a jackpot by reference. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "649", the jackpot is determined in advance as "jackpot", and when the value is any other value, it is determined in advance that it is "loss". In the present embodiment, pre-judgment is performed using the jackpot judgment table T1 used in the jackpot judgment process (FIG. 23) described later, but as another embodiment, it is used for prejudgment different from the jackpot judgment table T1. Prior determination may be performed using the jackpot determination table of

  If the result of the jackpot prior determination is “lost” (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot prior determination is "big hit" (step S304: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot type advance determination (step S305). In the jackpot type advance determination, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first determines the jackpot type random number as a determination value temporarily stored in the advance determination buffer by the special view 2 relationship random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208) To get Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs the preliminary determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, even if the jackpot type random number value is any of “0” to “127”, it is determined in advance that “16 RV passage planned jackpot”. In the present embodiment, preliminary determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later, but as another embodiment, the advance is different from the jackpot type determination table T5 Prior determination may be performed using a jackpot type determination table for determination.

  In step S306, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs a fluctuation pattern prior determination. More specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first determines the fluctuation pattern random number value as the determination value temporarily stored in the prior determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). And, get reach random value. Next, here, since the time saving state (time saving flag is ON), the gaming control microcomputer 81 refers to the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time saving state, and the jackpot prior determination result of step S304, The fluctuation pattern is specified from the presence / absence prior determination result of the reach obtained from the reach random number value and the fluctuation pattern random value. In the variation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the variation pattern to be selected may differ depending on the difference in the number of holding balls. Here, it is assumed that all variation patterns that may be selected due to differences in the number of holding balls are selected. For example, from the jackpot prior determination result and the reach presence / absence prior determination result, the reach presence loss is determined in advance, and when the variation pattern random number value is "60", the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines that the number of holding balls is "1 to 2". In the case of “”, two patterns of the variation pattern “P64” to be selected and the variation pattern “P68” to be selected when the number of holding balls is “3 to 4” are selected. In the present embodiment, the prior determination is performed using the variation pattern determination table T6 used in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later, but as another embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 The prior determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for prior determination different from.

  In step S307, the gaming control microcomputer 81 creates an advance determination command. The predetermination command includes a jackpot advance determination result, (in the case of a hit, a jackpot type predetermination result), and a fluctuation pattern predetermination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created prior determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this processing.

[Special figure 1 prior judgment processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special view 1 prior determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). First, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the probability change flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the above-described special view 2 prior determination process, when the probability change flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is ON, the prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot prior determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the prior determination buffer by the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S213). Do. Next, here, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF), the gaming control microcomputer 81 is a table for the normal probability state (big hit determination value “0” to “164” in the big hit determination table T1. It determines beforehand whether it is a jackpot based on "). That is, when the jackpot random number value is “0” to “164”, the jackpot is determined in advance as the “jackpot”, and when the value is any other value, it is determined in advance that the “loss” is made. Note that the jackpot prior determination may use a jackpot determination table for prior determination that is different from the jackpot determination table T1. Since the processes of steps S404 to S408 are the same as steps S304 to S308 of the special view 2 advance determination process (FIG. 18) described above, the description will be omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). First, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. If the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is changing (step S502). If the symbol is changing normally (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. When the variation of the normal symbol is not in progress (step S502: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of holding balls of the normal symbol is "0" (step S503). When the number of holding balls is "0" (step S503: YES), this process ends. If there is one or more holding ball number (step S503: NO), the normal symbol holding ball number is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes the gate 28 in the state where the number of balls in the normal symbol is "0", the number of balls in the normal symbol is temporarily "1" in step S203 of the start opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17). After that, in the present step S504, the reserve is digested and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol immediately becomes "0". The same applies to the number of balls held for special symbols. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved special symbols temporarily becomes "1", and then step S1404 and steps in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) described later. In S1410, the reserve is digested and the number of reserved balls in the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8C) (step S505). Specifically, first, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the normal symbol random number value (as the determination value) stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the common drawing suspension) of the common drawing suspension storage area 86 Read the random number value). Then, it is determined whether or not a hit is made using the normal symbol random number value, the gaming state (whether the time saving state or not), and the normal symbol hit determination table T3. For example, in the non-time saving state, if the normal symbol random number value is "0" to "2", it is determined to be "hit", and if the normal symbol random number value is other than that, it is determined to be "loss" (See FIG. 8 (C)).

  Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8D) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the gaming state (whether the time reduction state or not), and uses the determination result of the gaming state and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern judgment table T4 to change the normal symbol fluctuation. Select the variation time of the normal pattern as a pattern. Here, in the non-time-short state, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the time-short state, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" (see FIG. 8D) . The game control microcomputer 81 starts the variation display of the normal symbol by setting the selected normal symbol variation pattern (step S507).

  In step S508, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the variation time of the normal symbol has elapsed and has ended. The normal symbol fluctuation time is the fluctuation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8D). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 ends the present processing. That is, the variable display of the normal symbol is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time is over (step S508: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 stops the fluctuation display (step S509), and in the case of "losing" in the above-mentioned hit determination (step S505). (Step S510: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, in the case of "hit" in the above-mentioned hit determination (step S510: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the power chew open pattern (step S511). The open pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew open pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12A). Specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines the gaming state (whether the time reduction state or not), and uses the determination result of the gaming state and the electric chew open pattern judgment table T7 to use the open pattern of the electric chew 22. Choose Here, the "opening pattern 11" is selected in the non-time-short state, and the "opening pattern 12" is selected in the time-short state. After the opening pattern is selected, the gaming control microcomputer 81 starts the power-on operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this processing.

  In the above-described step S501, when the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of winning prizes for the electric chow 22 has reached a prescribed maximum winning number (for example, six), or the time for which the electric chow 22 is closed after the operation time of the electric chow 22 is closed. It is that one of the achievements is satisfied. The operation time of the electric chow 22 is an operation time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. If the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 ends the present process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and the main processing is performed. Finish.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing relating to the special symbol display 41 and the big winning device (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is "1" of "special operation status" Called "2", "3", "4". When the “special operation status” is “1” (step S1301: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, jackpot determination, variation pattern selection and the like are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), the special symbol change process is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol change processing, the output of the change stop command is executed after the change time has elapsed. When the "special operation status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol determination processing is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol determination process, an output of an opening command or the like is executed at the time of a jackpot. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric combination processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric role processing, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The special operation status is “1” in the initial setting.

[Special symbol standby process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special view 2 holding ball number is "0" (step S1401). When the special figure 2 reservation sphere number is “0” (step S1401: YES), that is, in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the random value group acquired due to the winning of the second starting port 21 If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1407. If the special figure 2 holding ball number is “1” or more (step S1401: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the special figure 2 holding ball number is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 reads the storage location of the hold information (various random number values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special view hold storage area 85b to the side where the storage location is read from the current position. While shifting by one, the hold information stored in the farthest place from the side to be read out in the second special-image hold storage area 85b is cleared (step S1405). For example, when the hold information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the hold information stored in the third storage area is cleared and the hold information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If there is, the hold information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. By the above-described steps, the second Tokusou reserve is digested in the order in which it is suspended. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the holding image 9B (the leftmost holding image 9B among the four holding images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special It shifts to the reserve digest image display area side and is displayed as a reserve digest image 9C. In addition, the reserve images 9B (the second, third and fourth reserve images 9B from the left among the four reserve images 9B) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special view reserve storage area 85b are on the left side, respectively. Shift one (Figure 1). As a result, the player can recognize that one second Tokusetsu reserve has been digested. Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process is set in the fluctuation time timer. Further, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2". In addition, in the fluctuation start command (special figure 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, information about the special figure stop symbol data set in the big hit judgment process (step S1402) and the fluctuation pattern selection process ( Information on the fluctuation pattern set in step S1403) (including information on fluctuation time) is included.

  In step S1401, when the special figure 2 holding ball number is “0” (step S1401: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the special figure 1 holding ball number is “0” ( Step S1407). When the special figure 1 reservation ball number is “0” (step S1407: YES), that is, in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, the random value group acquired due to the winning of the first starting port 20 If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1413. When the special figure 1 holding ball number is “1” or more (step S1407: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the special figure 1 holding ball number is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of the various random number values stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special view storage area 85a to the side read from the current position by one. At the same time, the hold information stored in the farthest place from the side to be read out in the first special image hold storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). By the above-described steps, the first special map reservation is digested in the order in which it is held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold image 9A (the hold image 9A at the right end of the four hold images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special It shifts to the reserve digest image display area side and is displayed as a reserve digest image 9C. In addition, reserve images 9A (the second, third and fourth reserve images 9A from the left among the four reserve images 9A) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special view reserve storage area 85a are on the right side, respectively. Shift one (Figure 1). As a result, the player can recognize that one first Tokusetsu reserve has been digested. Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process is set in the fluctuation time timer. Further, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1406). In addition, in the fluctuation start command (special figure 1 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, information about the special figure stop symbol data set in the big hit judgment process (step S1408) and the fluctuation pattern selection process ( Information on the variation pattern set in step S1409) (including information on variation time) is included.

  In step S1407, when the special figure 1 holding ball number is “0” (step S1407: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1413). The standby screen is a demonstration screen for waiting for customers. The gaming control microcomputer 81 may determine, for example, by turning on / off the demonstration screen display flag for waiting for a customer. If it is the standby screen (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a customer waiting standby command for displaying a standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 after a predetermined standby time has elapsed. (Step S1414), this processing ends. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of the present embodiment, the variation display of the special symbol based on the first special view suspension is executed only when the second special view suspension is "0". That is, the second special view reserve digest is executed prior to the first special view reserve digest. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the jackpot based on the second special view suspension is a jackpot (V passing scheduled jackpot) for the player with a larger profit for the player than the lottery based on the first special view suspension. It is easy to win the

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). The jackpot determination process (step S1402) of the special figure 2 and the jackpot determination process (step S1408) of the special figure 1 have the same process flow, and therefore will be collectively described. In the jackpot determination process, first, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the probability change flag is ON (step S1501). If the probability change flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the jackpot determination is performed with reference to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first reads a jackpot random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of the special view 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the second special view hold) of the second special view hold storage area 85b is read. In the jackpot determination process of the special view 1, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the first special view hold) of the first special view hold storage area 85a is read. Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a jackpot is made using the jackpot determination table T1 to be referred to and the jackpot random number value. Here, since the high probability state (probability change flag is ON), whether or not the big hit is made based on the high probability state table (big hit determination value is “0” to “649”) in the big hit determination table T1. judge.

  In step S1501, when the probability change flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot determination with reference to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) ( Step S1504). Specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first reads the jackpot random number value by the same method as step S1502. Next, here, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF), whether the jackpot based on the table for the normal probability state (jackpot determination value “0” to “164”) in the jackpot determination table T1 It is determined whether or not.

  If the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot type random number value as the determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of the special view 2, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the second special view reservation storage area 85b is read. In the jackpot determination process of the special view 1, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the first special view reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After the determination of the jackpot type, the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) according to the identified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, when the result of the big hit determination is "loss", the special figure stop symbol data (01H) according to the lost symbol is set in the big hit type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520) , End this process.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). The variation pattern selection process (step S1403) of the special figure 2 and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409) of the special figure 1 have the same process flow, and therefore will be collectively described. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the gaming state is the short time state (step S1600). The determination as to whether or not the time saving state is made depends on whether the time saving flag is ON. When it is in the time saving state (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. If the time saving state is not set (step S1600: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot is the special view 2 (step S1603). If the jackpot is the special view 2 (step S1603: YES), the jackpot type is always the V-passing scheduled jackpot, so the process skips to step S1605. If the jackpot is special view 1 (step S1603: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot type is the V passage scheduled jackpot (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. It is carried out based on the special figure stop symbol data being done.

  If the jackpot type is V passage planned jackpot (step S1604: YES), the microcomputer for gaming control 81 changes with reference to the non-time-short state V passage planned jackpot table of the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first reads out the fluctuation pattern random number value as the determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of the special view 2, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the second special view suspension) of the second special view suspension storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the first special figure retention) of the first special figure retention storage area 85a is read out. Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random number value. Here, as a table for the non-time short state V passing scheduled jackpot, a portion corresponding to the V passing scheduled jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time short status shown in FIG. 10 (the variation pattern is “P1 in FIG. The part from “P3” to “P3”, and from “P21” to “P23” as the variation pattern in Special Figure 2 is referred to (address is set). From the read variation pattern random value, any one of "P1" to "P3" is selected as a variation pattern in Special Figure 1 and any one from "P21" to "P23" is selected in Special Figure 2.

  If the jackpot type is V non-passing planned jackpot (step S1604: NO), the microcomputer for game control 81 refers to the table for non-time-short state V non-passing planned jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). Then, the variation pattern is selected (step S1606). Here, as a table for the non-time short state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, a portion ("P4" to "P6") corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot among the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time short status shown in FIG. Part) is referenced. One of “P4” to “P6” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value.

  If the big hit flag is off in step S1602 (step S1602: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the reach random number is a reach establishment random number (step S1607). Specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first reads out the reach random number value as the determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special view 2, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the second special view hold) of the second special view hold storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special view 1, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the first special view hold) of the first special view hold storage area 85a is read. Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of the reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8 (B)) and the reach random number value. Here, since it is in the non-time-short state, in the reach determination table T2, the table for the non-time-short state (the reach presence determination value (reach establishment random number value) is a portion of “0” to “13”) Determine the presence or absence.

  If the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1607: YES), that is, if there is a reach presence loss, the gaming control microcomputer 81 is in the non-time-short state of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The variation pattern is selected with reference to the reach presence loss table (step S1608). Here, as a table for loss with non-time-short status reach, a portion corresponding to reach-with-miss in fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-short status shown in FIG. 10 (the variation pattern is “P7” in In the part "P14", in the special figure 2, the variation pattern is referred to as "P24" to "P31"). In Special Figure 1, any one of "P7" to "P14" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value and the current special figure 1 holding ball number (1 to 4). In Special Figure 2, any of "P24" to "P31" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value and the current special figure 2 holding ball number (1 to 4). Since the variation pattern to be selected changes depending on the number of holding balls, the function of the shortening variation according to the number of holding balls works. That is, in both of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, when the number of holding balls is “3” to “4”, the fluctuation time is compared with when the number of holding balls is “1” to “2”. Short variation patterns are more likely to be selected. This makes it possible to speed up the speed at which special figures are suspended when the number of balls held is large.

  If the reach random number value is not the reach establishment random number value (step S1607: NO), that is, if there is no reach loss, the gaming control microcomputer 81 is in the non-time-short state of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The variation pattern is selected with reference to the no reach loss table (step S1609). Here, as a table for non-short time reach non-reach loss, a portion corresponding to non-reach non-reach out of fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for non-time short state shown in FIG. 10 (the fluctuation pattern is “P15” in special figure 1 to In the part "P16", in the special figure 2, the variation pattern is referred to as "P32" to "P33". In Special Figure 1, either "P15" or "P16" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value and the current special figure 1 holding ball number (1 to 4). In the special figure 2, either "P32" or "P33" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value and the current special figure 2 holding ball number (1 to 4). Here also, since the variation pattern to be selected changes depending on the number of holding balls, the function of the shortening variation according to the number of holding balls works.

  When it is determined in step S1600 that the gaming state is the short time state, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). The processes in steps S1613 to S1619 are the same as the processes in steps S1603 to S1609 described above except for the following points. The difference between the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 and the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 is that the portions of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 to be referred to in steps S1615, S1616, S1618 and S1619 have already been described in steps S1605, S1606, S1608 and S1609. It is different from Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, while the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-short time state is referred to, in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the time short state is used. The variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is V passage scheduled jackpot, a portion corresponding to V passage scheduled jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 for time shortening state shown in FIG. Are referred to as “P41” to “P43”, and the special pattern 2 refers to “P61” to “P63” as the variation pattern. From the read variation pattern random number value, any one of "P41" to "P43" is selected as a variation pattern in Special Figure 1 and any one of "P61" to "P63" is selected in Special Figure 2. Also, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is V non-passing planned jackpot, a portion corresponding to V non-passing planned jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the short time state shown in FIG. "To" P46 "is referred to. One of “P44” to “P46” is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value.

  After selecting the fluctuation pattern as described above, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the selected fluctuation pattern (step S1630) and ends the present processing. The information of the set fluctuation pattern is included in the fluctuation start command and transmitted to the sub control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 16: step S108). Thereby, the variable display of the special symbol is started.

[Process during special symbol change]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21: step S1304). First, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed and has ended (step S1701). The variation time of the special symbol is the variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the above-mentioned variation pattern selection process (FIG. 24, FIG. 25). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this processing ends. That is, the variation display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), the fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing in response to the fluctuation stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variation display of the special symbol with a symbol according to the set special symbol stop symbol data. Thereafter, the gaming control microcomputer 81 ends the present process.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of special symbol determination processing (FIG. 21: step S1306). First, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs gaming state management processing (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for managing the number of times of ST and the number of times of time reduction, and the contents will be described later. After the gaming state management processing, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1808), and the present process is ended. Thereby, the jackpot game is not started, and the process shifts to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) again, and the jackpot determination etc. for the next hold is executed.

  If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the V opening / closing member according to the type of the jackpot winning (step S1803). Specifically, with reference to the special winning opening open pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the special winning opening from the special view stop symbol data, and the determined open pattern set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the special winning opening. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the open pattern of the V open / close member 71 from the special view stop symbol data with reference to the V open / close member open pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14) and sets the determined open pattern. . For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "open pattern 31" is set as the open pattern of the V open / close member 71. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of the jackpot which has been won, together with the set of the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the V opening / closing member. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, “16” is set to the round counter (FIG. 13 (B)).

  After setting the release pattern, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs gaming state reset processing (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the probability change flag and the time saving flag, and the contents will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start the jackpot game, the jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). Thereafter, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and the process ends.

[Playing state management processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the gaming state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). First, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the probability change flag is ON (step S2001). If the probability change flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of times of variation of the special symbol executed during the high probability state. Here, “160” is set in the probability change counter at the time of transition to the high probability state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the probability change counter by 1 (step S2003). If the value of the probability change counter is not “0” (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the value of the probability variation counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

  In step S2005, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time saving flag is ON. If the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. If the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time saving counter is to count the number of times of variation of the special symbol executed during the time saving state. Here, at the time of transition to the time saving state, "100" is set in the time reduction counter if the low probability high base state, and "160" is set in the time reduction counter if the high probability high base state. The microcomputer for game control 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become “0” as a result of decrementing the time reduction counter by 1 (step S2007). If the value of the time saving counter is not “0” (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. If the value of the time saving counter is “0” (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

  In step S2009, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets a gaming state designating command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and completes this processing. The game state specification command includes information on the currently set game state (whether or not a probability change state, a probability change counter value, a time reduction state or not, a time reduction counter value, etc.).

[Playing state reset process]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the gaming state reset process (FIG. 27: step S1804). First, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the probability change flag is ON (step S2101). If the probability change flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. If the probability change flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability change flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time saving flag is ON. If the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), this process ends. If the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched OFF (step S2104). That is, during the execution of the jackpot game, the non-high probability state and the non-short time state. In the gaming machine 1, since the low base state is always in the non-time-short state, the low base state is in progress during the jackpot game.

[Special electric role processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric symbol processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). First, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big hit end flag is ON (step S2200). The "big hit end flag" is a flag indicating that all the big winning devices (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) are completely opened based on the opening pattern in the running big hit game. If the big hit end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the big hit end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), V opening and closing member operation processing for operating the V opening and closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V open / close member 71 of the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of gaming balls are won in the first big winning opening 30, and in the V open / close member operation process, according to the V open / close member open pattern T9. The V opening and closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period when the predetermined number of game balls are to be won. Details of the V open / close member operation process will be described later. After the V open / close member operation process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) is open (step S2202). If it is open (YES in step S2202), the process proceeds to step S2210.

  When the special winning opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is time (timing) to open the special winning opening (step S2203). In the time of opening the big winning opening, for example, when the opening time of the big hit has passed and it has reached the opening start time in the first round game, or the big winning opening which is temporarily closed after opening is reopened It includes the time when the interval time (closing time) has passed and it is time to start opening again. If it is not time to open the special winning opening (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

  If it is time to open the special winning opening (timing) (step S2203: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs a special winning opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the large winning opening (the first large winning opening 30 or the second large winning opening 35) in accordance with the opening pattern (FIG. 13) corresponding to the type of the big hit. After the special winning opening opening process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets a round designating command (step S2208). The round designating command includes information on the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the round designating command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In addition, in this embodiment, the opening of the big winning a prize opening of a plurality of times is not made in one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the large winning opening is opened a plurality of times during one round game, the gaming control microcomputer 81 is configured to open the large winning opening in one round. It may be determined whether or not it is the first release, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first release. After setting the round designation command, the process ends.

  In step S2202 described above, if the special winning opening is open (YES in step S2202), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of winning prizes for the special winning opening in the round game has reached the prescribed maximum winning number (for example, 9 per round), or it has reached the time for closing the special winning mouth That is, either (that is, that a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed since the opening of the special winning opening) is satisfied. Then, if the closing condition of the special winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 ends the present processing. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the special winning opening (step S2211).

  If it is not the time (timing) to open the special winning opening in the above-described step S2203, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) elapses after the big winning opening is closed. As mentioned above, it is because time (interval time) of closing of a big winning opening between round games is included in the opening round game before the closing. The gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is over depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the closing of the special winning opening. If the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends the present process.

  When the round game is over (step S2220: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the value of the round counter to 1 decrement (step S2221), and the value of the round counter is "0" or not A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the defined number of round games has not been digested yet, this processing is ended to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is “0”, the jackpot ending command is set as the jackpot end processing for ending the jackpot game (step S2227), and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In the present embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when there is a passage of gaming balls to the V region 39 in “16R (essentially 13R) V planned to pass jackpot” is “16R (essentially 13R) V non-passable scheduled It is the same length as the ending time when there is no passage of the gaming ball to the V area 39 in the "big hit". As a result, even if the game ball passes to the V region 39 in the "16R (essential 13R) V scheduled planned jackpot" for the player, the "16R (essentially 13R) V non-scheduled projected jackpot" And the passage of the gaming ball to the V area 39 can be recognized. In addition, the ending time when there is no passage of the game ball to V field 39 in "16R (actually 13R) V passage planned jackpot" is also the same length as these. After the start of the jackpot ending, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and the process ends.

  In the above-mentioned step S2200, when the big hit end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), since the last round is finished, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ending time of the big hit has passed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 ends the present processing. On the other hand, when the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 turns off the big hit end flag (step S2231) and turns off the big hit flag (step S2232), and the special operation status Is set to "1" (step S2233). Thereby, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again in the next special operation process. Thereafter, a game state setting process (step S2234) described later is executed to complete this process.

[V opening and closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 30: step S2201). The gaming control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the current round game (the round) is the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71. When the value of the round counter is “15”, “13”, “11”, “9”, “7”, “5”, the gaming control microcomputer 81 can determine that it is an open round. When it is not the open round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process ends. This is because there is no need to operate the V open / close member 71 in the round.

  If it is the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The “first winning flag” is a flag indicating that the first big winning opening 30 has a first prize in the round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. If the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether a first winning is detected (step S2503). If the first ball winning combination has not been detected (step S2503: NO), this processing ends. This is because there is no winning in the first large winning opening 30 in the round, and there is no need to operate the V opening / closing member 71.

  When the first ball winning combination is detected (step S2503: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 opens the V open / close member 71 for short and performs V effective period setting processing (step S2504). In the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14B), the V opening / closing member 71 is short-opened, regardless of whether “short opening” or “long opening”, the first ball is won Sometimes it is to execute short release (here 0.1 second). Since the open time of the V open / close member 71 is very short in the short open of the V open / close member 71, the first game ball that has won the first large winning opening 30 does not pass the V area 39 and is not It is configured to pass through the V region 70. In the V effective period setting process, while the V open / close member 71 is open and for several seconds after the V open / close member 71 is closed, the V effective period in which the detection of the gaming ball by the V area sensor 39a is effective is set. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V open / close member 71 for short in accordance with the open pattern of the V open / close member 71 (FIG. 14B) and opens the V open / close member 71. And 1 second after closing is set to V effective period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V-effective period (including the case where the jackpot game is not executed) as a V-ineffective period in which the detection of the gaming ball by the V area sensor 39a is determined to be ineffective. Here, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is effective" means that the V flag is turned on based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (V area sensor detection described later) Processing (see FIG. 33)). In addition, “determining the detection of the gaming ball by the V area sensor 39a as invalid” means that the V flag is not turned on even when the detection of the gaming ball by the V area sensor 39a is performed. The reason why the V effective period includes a few seconds after the closing of the V open / close member 71 (ball brushing period) is because there is a physical distance between the V open / close member 71 and the V region sensor 39a. It takes into consideration the period until the gaming ball having entered the V area 39 side immediately before the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 is detected by the V area sensor 39a. That is, in this case, the V flag is turned ON only when V passage (V game region passes to V region 39) during the V effective period is detected, and V flag is detected when V passage is detected outside the V effective period (V invalid period). It is decided not to turn it on. When the V flag is ON, the probability change flag is ON, that is, the gaming state after the big hit game is set to the high probability state (see later-described gaming state setting processing (FIG. 32)). By doing this, the V flag is turned on based on the V passage due to the fraudulent action, and the high probability state is not set. After the short open of the V open / close member 71 and the V effective period setting process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

  In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if there is already a first ball winning (step S2502: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the second winning flag is ON or not (Step S2520). The “second winning flag” is a flag indicating that the first large winning opening 30 has a second winning in a case where the open pattern of the V open / close member 71 in the round is long open. If the second winning flag is ON (step S 2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S 2540. If the second winning flag is OFF (step S 2520: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the open pattern of the V open / close member 71 in the round is long open (step S 2521). If the long release is not performed (step S 2521: NO), that is, if the short release is performed, the process proceeds to step S 2540. On the other hand, if the game player is in the long open state (step S 2521: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball has been detected (step S 2522). If the second winning combination has not been detected (step S 2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S 2540.

  When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening / closing member 71 long and performs V effective period setting processing (step S2523). The V open / close member 71 is long open in the open pattern of the V open / close member 71 (FIG. 14B), in the case of “long open”, the long open at the winning of the second ball (here, up to 31.5 seconds) ) To execute. In this case, since one round game time is 31.5 seconds at the longest (29.5 seconds for the big winning opening maximum opening time + 2 seconds for the interval closing time), generally, the second game winning a prize The time from time to the end of the round is less than 31.5 seconds. As described later, since the V open / close member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, the open time of the long open of the V open / close member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, since the open time of the V open / close member 71 is relatively long, at least a part of the game balls after the second ball winning a prize in the first large winning opening 30 has the V area 39 It is configured to pass. In the V effective period setting process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the V open period as the V open period during the opening and closing of the V open / close member 71 and sets the V inactive period together with the closing of the V open / close member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V open / close member 71 and the V effective period setting process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S 2524), and proceeds to step S 2540.

  In step S 2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the V open / close member 71 is open. If the V opening / closing member 71 is open (step S 2540: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round game has ended (step S 2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is over depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time (two seconds in this case) has passed since the closing of the special winning opening. Make a decision.

  When the round game is over (step S 2550: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S 2551), and the V open / close member closing process and the V invalid period A setting process is performed (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V open / close member 71, and after a few seconds (1 second in this case) after the V open / close member 71 is closed, Set and finish this process.

  If the round game has not ended (step S 2550: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71 is satisfied (step S 2560). The closing condition of the V open / close member 71 can be exemplified by, for example, that a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed after the opening of the V open / close member 71 if the short open is open. If the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), the V open / close member closing process and the V invalid period setting process are performed (step S2552), and this process ends. When the closing condition is not satisfied (step S2560: NO), the processing is ended while the V opening / closing member 71 is in the open state and the V effective period is continued.

  In step S2540, when it is determined that the V opening / closing member 71 is closing (NO in step S2540), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is over (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572), and ends this processing. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), this process ends.

[Playing state setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the gaming state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The gaming control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the V flag is ON (step S2301). If the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and "100" is set in the time saving counter (step S2303). As a result, the gaming state after the present jackpot game becomes the "non-high probability state", the "time saving state" and the "high base state" (that is, the low probability high base). This low-probability high-base state ends when either of the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times or the next jackpot is won, or the condition is met.

  On the other hand, if the V flag is ON at step S2301 (step S2301: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability change flag (step S2304) and sets "160" to the probability change counter (step S2305), The V flag is turned off (step S2306). Also, the gaming control microcomputer 81 turns on the time saving flag (step S2307), and sets "160" in the time saving counter (step S2308). As a result, the gaming state after the present jackpot game becomes "high probability state" and "time saving state" and "high base state" (that is, high probability high base). This high-probability-high-base state ends when either of the variable display of special symbols is performed 160 times or the next jackpot is won, or any of the conditions is met.

  In step S2309, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets a gaming state designating command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and completes this processing. The gaming state designation command includes information on the gaming state which has just been set.

[V-area sensor detection process]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not there is a detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601). If there is no detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if there is detection (step S2601: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is during the V-valid period (step S2602). The V effective period is a period set by the V effective period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of the V open / close member operation process (FIG. 31). The V validity period is set to the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the opening and closing seconds of the V opening / closing member 71 during the twelfth round (ball brushing period) Be done. If the V effective period is not in progress (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is during the V effective period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V pass command (step S2604), and ends this processing. .

[Holding ball processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the holding ball number process (FIG. 16: step S107). The gaming control microcomputer 81 first reads out the special figure 1 holding ball number, the special figure 2 holding ball number, and the normal symbol holding ball number stored in the main RAM 84 (step S 2701). Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the hold ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The ball holding ball number command is a command for notifying the sub control board 90 of the ball holding number, and includes information about the special figure 1 holding ball number, the special figure 2 holding ball number, and the normal symbol holding ball number . After setting of the holding ball number command, the gaming control microcomputer 81 ends the present process.

7. Operation of Effect Control Microcomputer 91 The operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub control substrate 90 (FIG. 4) will be described on the basis of FIGS. A counter, a flag, a status, a buffer and the like appearing in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub RAM 94.

[Sub control main process]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub control main process. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub control main process from the sub ROM 93. In the sub control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, setting of the sub CPU 92, resetting of various flags, status, counters and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

  After the CPU initialization process, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits the interruption of the interrupt process (step S4015) and performs the random number update process (step S4020). In this random number updating process, the effect control microcomputer 91 adds 1 to the random number counter value shown in FIG. Each random number counter value is returned to "0" and added again when the set upper limit value is reached. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0”, or may be randomly changed. In addition to adding one by one, two or more random numbers may be added. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

  After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S4025). While the interrupt is permitted, execution of the sub timer interrupt processing (step S4035) is possible. The sub timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. That is, the sub timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, after the sub timer interrupt processing ends, the random number updating process is repeatedly executed until the sub timer interrupt processing is started next.

[Sub side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub timer interrupt process (FIG. 35: step S4035). First, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a received command analysis process (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis process will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a process during variation effect (step S4305). The processing during fluctuation presentation is processing for setting a command before the end of fluctuation at a specific timing during fluctuation presentation and causing the display screen 7a to execute a particular display presentation, and the details will be described later. After the fluctuation effect processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs switch processing (step S4310). In the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display content of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. . After the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs command transmission processing (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 by the reception command analysis process etc. as the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. , Transmit to the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received various commands executes display effects corresponding to the received commands using the image display device 7. In addition, the voice control board 106 that has received various commands executes a voice effect that outputs voice from the speaker 67 according to the received command. The lamp control board 107 that has received various commands executes lamp effects for controlling the light emission of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 according to the received commands. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends the process. In the other processes, for example, a random number update process or the like is performed.

[Receive command analysis process]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). First, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether a predetermination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it is received (step S4415: YES), pre-reading effect determination processing is performed (step S4420). The “pre-reading effect determination process” is a process of determining whether or not pre-reading effect is to be performed, and a pre-reading effect pattern in the case of performing the pre-reading effect. Details of the pre-reading effect determination processing will be described later. On the other hand, when not having received (step S4415: NO), the above-mentioned pre-reading effect determination processing is skipped. The preread effect is an effect that indicates that there is a high possibility that a jackpot is included in the hold information newly stored in the special view hold storage area 85, and is executed during the change effect.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it is received (step S4445: YES), a suspension display process is performed (step S4450). In the suspension display process, provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 based on the information about the special figure 1 reserve ball number, the special figure 2 reserve ball number, and the normal symbol reserve ball number included in the reserve ball number command The values of the first special view hold effect counter, the second special view hold effect counter, and the common drawing hold effect counter are updated. As a result, not only the main control board 80 side but also the sub control board 90 side can hold the information of the number of holding balls. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to hold image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a based on the values of the first special view hold effect counter, the second special view hold effect counter, and the general drawing hold effect counter, Update 9B. On the other hand, when the holding ball number command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-mentioned holding display process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the change start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). If it is received (step S4455: YES), the fluctuation effect start process is performed (step S4460). The "variation effect start process" is a process of selecting a variation effect pattern (content) to be executed during special symbol variation. Details of the change production start process will be described later. On the other hand, when not received (step S4455: NO), the above-mentioned change production start process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the change stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it is received (step S4465: YES), the fluctuation effect end process is performed (step S4470). "Variation production end processing" is processing for stopping the fluctuation production performed during special symbol variation. In the fluctuation effect end process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a counter and the like based on the analysis result of the fluctuation stop command, and sets a fluctuation effect end command for ending the fluctuation effect. As a result, the decorative symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 during the change is stopped and displayed. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs an advance determination information shift process (FIG. 39) described later. If the fluctuation stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation effect ending process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If it is received (step S4475: YES), an opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The “opening effect pattern determination process” is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (content) to be executed at the start of the special game (big hit game). In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and sets in the sub RAM 94 information related to the special figure stop symbol data set at the big hit winning determination included in the opening command. Then, an effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special view stop symbol data is selected, and an opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is displayed in the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94 Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94 b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 ROMs a predetermined opening effect image. , And displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. When the opening command is not received in step S4475 (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If it is received (step S4485: YES), round effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4490). The “round effect pattern determination process” is a process for selecting an open game effect pattern (content) to be executed during the opening of the special winning opening or in the interval between open in the special game (big hit game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designating command, and sets information relating to the special figure stop symbol data included in the round designating command and information relating to the number of rounds in the sub RAM 94 Do. Then, a special effect pattern of the round effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and a round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is produced by the sub RAM 94 It is set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and causes the display screen 7a to display the same. When the round designation command is not received in step S4485 (step S4485: NO), the above-described round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If it is received (step S4495: YES), ending effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4500). The “ending effect pattern determination process” is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of the special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command, and sets information on special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub RAM 94. Then, an ending effect pattern corresponding to the type of hit indicated by the special view stop symbol data is selected, and an ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM 94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and causes the display screen 7a to display the same. If the ending command has not been received (step S4495: NO), the above-mentioned ending effect pattern determination process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processes, for example, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives a game state designating command, information relating to the game state included in the game state designating command (high probability state or not, time change state or not, definite variation The sub RAM 94 holds the counter, the value of the time reduction counter, and the like. Further, when the V control command is received, the effect control microcomputer 91 causes the sub RAM 94 to hold the V-passed information. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (wait for customer wait command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing.

[Pre-reading effect determination processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of pre-reading effect determination processing (FIG. 37: step S4420). First, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs predetermination information rewriting processing (step S4601). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 is included in the advance determination command received from the main control board 80, the jackpot advance determination result (jackpot determination information), the jackpot type advance determination result (jackpot type information), The pattern predetermination result (variation pattern information) is stored in the predetermination information storage area 94c.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram for describing the configuration of the prior determination information storage area 94c. In addition to the above-described jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, and variation pattern information, the advance determination information storage area 94c stores prefetch presentation effect pattern information. Pre-reading effect pattern information is information which shows the contents of pre-reading effect which is executed during fluctuation production, is selected in step S4604 which it mentions later. FIG. 39 (A) shows the jackpot determination information "losing" and fluctuation pattern information "P72" and "P73" as the first to third special determination results respectively corresponding to the first to third special drawing 2 reservations. It is stored in the storage area, and a state in which the prior determination result corresponding to the change is stored in the area is shown. In FIG. 39 (B), there is a prize in the special figure 2 from the state of FIG. 39 (A), and the preliminary determination information included in the preliminary determination command received from the main control board 80 is the fourth in the special figure 2 reserve. The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, as the prior determination information, the big hit determination information “big hit”, the big hit type information “21H”, and the fluctuation pattern information “P61” are stored. In addition, together with the first to fourth storage areas corresponding to the first to fourth special drawing 2 suspension and the corresponding areas corresponding to the fluctuation, “pattern A” as the preread effect pattern information "Is set. FIG. 39C shows a state in which the predetermination information shift process is performed after the change ends from the state of FIG. 39B. Specifically, the prior determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the area, and the prior determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas, 4 The prior determination information of the storage area is cleared. The prior determination information shift process is executed in the fluctuation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

  Returning to FIG. 38, subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in the prior determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in any of the area of the prior determination information storage area 94 c and the first to fourth storage areas. If pre-reading effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this processing ends. That is, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in any of the area of the prior determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas, pre-reading effect pattern information is not newly selected and stored. On the other hand, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is not stored in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the pre-judgment result included in the received pre-judgment command is “big hit”. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not "reach with loss" (step S4603). Whether the "big hit" or the "reach with loss" can be determined, for example, by the change pattern prior determination result (change pattern information). If the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is “loss without reach” (step S4603: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 ends the present process. This is because there is no need to perform pre-reading effects. On the other hand, when the preliminary determination result included in the received preliminary determination command is "big hit" or "reach with loss" (step S4603: YES), pre-reading effect execution determination to determine whether to perform pre-reading effect, And, pre-reading effect pattern selection is done (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the counter of the prefetch effect random number, and refers to the acquired random value and the prefetch effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the prefetch effect Whether or not to perform, and a pre-reading effect pattern when performing pre-reading effect is decided.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the pre-reading effect pattern determination table T51. In FIG. 40, when the preliminary determination result is "big hit" and the pre-reading effect random number value is "0 to 55", the pre-reading effect is "none", and the pre-reading effect random number value is "56 to 67" as a pre-reading effect When “pattern A” is selected and the pre-reading effect random number value is “68 to 127”, “pattern B” is selected as pre-reading effect. In addition, when the pre-determination result is “reach with loss” and the pre-reading effect random number value is “0 to 107”, the pre-reading effect is “absent”, and the pre-reading effect random number value is “108 to 114” as the pre-reading effect When “pattern A” is selected and the pre-reading effect random number value is “115 to 127”, “pattern B” is selected as pre-reading effect. The type and content of the pre-reading effect pattern, and the range of the random value to be selected can be set arbitrarily.

  Returning to FIG. 38, when it is determined in step S4604 that the pre-reading effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected pre-reading effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the pre-reading effect pattern is stored in the prior determination information storage area 94c, among the first to fourth storage areas, not only the storage area corresponding to the received prior determination command but also the storage before the corresponding storage area. The preread effect pattern is also stored in the area and the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (B), not only “pattern A” is set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received prior determination command, but also the first to third storage areas, and the area concerned Also set "pattern A". Thus, the prefetching effect pattern A is executed also in the fluctuation effect (variation effect corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas) executed before the fluctuation effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed. . In addition, it is based on the progress condition of the said fluctuation production whether the prefetch effect is performed by the fluctuation production corresponding to the said area | region. That is, if the timing to execute the pre-reading effect has already passed in the variation effect, the pre-reading effect is not executed, but if it is before the timing to execute the pre-reading effect, it is executed at that timing. This will be described later. If it is determined in step S4604 that the pre-reading effect is not performed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Change production start process]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the fluctuation effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets information on the special view stop symbol data included in the change start command and information on the change pattern in the sub RAM 94. The set information includes gaming state information indicating the current gaming state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a determination result of the hit determination processing of the special view 1 or the special view 2, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 as appropriate.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs key effect pattern determination processing (step S5010). The basic effect pattern determination process is based on the basic configuration of the change effect (for example, the display and switching of the background image on the image display device 7, the display and operation of a predetermined character, and the output of melody and sound effect using the speaker 67 , And lighting control of lamps, etc.). The fluctuation effect is completed by superimposing additional effects such as chance-up effect and pre-reading effect on this basic effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines the main effect pattern with reference to the main effect pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub ROM 93.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining a base effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, a plurality of types of backbone rendering patterns for performing normal reach rendering, a plurality of types of backbone rendering patterns for performing SP1 rendering, a plurality of types of backbone rendering patterns for performing SP2 rendering, and a plurality of types of backbone rendering patterns for performing SP3 rendering A plurality of basic effect patterns are set to perform a no reach non-stop effect. The type of the core rendering pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is “P1”, a key effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is “P72”, a base effect pattern for performing a no reach loss effect is selected.

  Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the main effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a chance-up effect pattern determination process (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the fluctuation effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the chance-up random number counter, and determines the chance-up effect pattern with reference to the acquired random value and the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub ROM 93.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only a portion of the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 for determining the change effect pattern of the special view 1 in the non-time-short state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows a chance-up effect pattern that is executed when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is “P1” to “P16”. In addition, the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 is a portion that determines the chance-up effect pattern to be executed when the variation pattern is “P21” to “P33” “P41” to “P56” “61” to “73”. It may or may not be provided.

  In FIG. 43, as the chance-up effect pattern, “2-NO”, “2-SP1”, “2-SP2”, “2-SP3”, “3-NO”, “3-SP1”, “3-SP2”, “3-SP3” “ “4-NO”, “4-SP1”, “4-SP2”, “4-SP3” and “ANO” are set. These chance presentation patterns correspond to the various chance-up presentation described later.

  Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 further refers to the random number value and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54, and combines the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R etc. You may decide By these, it is determined what kind of effect to be performed as the fluctuation effect.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 sets a change effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that a change effect based on the change effect pattern determined in the above steps S5010 to S5015 is realized ( Step S5020). When the fluctuation effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 changes the fluctuation effect image. It is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a variation effect timer (step S5030), and ends the present process. A fluctuation time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is set in the fluctuation production timer. For example, when the fluctuation pattern is "P1", "40 seconds" is set to the fluctuation effect timer.

[Processing during variation production]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the process (FIG. 36: step S 4305) in the time of the variable effect production. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a change effect is being performed (step S4701). Whether or not the variation effect is being performed can be determined, for example, based on whether or not the variation effect timer is zero. If the variable performance is not in progress (step SS4701: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, when the variable effect is being performed (step SS4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether it is the timing to set the command before the end of the change in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation end command is a command to notify the image control board 100 or the like that the effect control microcomputer 91 has a specific timing during the variable stage effect, and the image control board 100 receives the pre-variation end command. Switching of the effect contents, display of a specific image, and the like are performed according to the information included in the command before the end of fluctuation.

  If it is not the timing to set the command before the end of change (step S4702: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is time to set a command before the end of fluctuation (step S4702: YES), it is judged whether or not there is prefetch presentation effect pattern information in the area of the prior judgment information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), a pre-variation end command including pre-reading effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-variation end command not including pre-reading effect pattern information is set in the sub command generation area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4705). Thereby, when there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a pre-change end command including pre-reading effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the changing effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 causes the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 to start the pre-reading effect for displaying the pre-reading effect image. On the other hand, even when there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a command before the end of change is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the change. Here, when the preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a preview fade effect in which the preview image is faded.

8. Operation of Image Control Microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided on the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described based on FIG. A buffer or the like appearing in the description of the operation of the image control microcomputer 101 is provided in the RAM 104. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the display control process. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a program from the ROM 103, and after CPU initialization processing, display control processing is repeatedly executed. In the display control process, first, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a fluctuation presentation start command has been received from the sub control board 90 (step S5001). If it is received (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the fluctuation effect display (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received change effect start command, reads a predetermined change effect image instructed in the change effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Display. On the other hand, when not having received (step S5001: NO), the above-mentioned processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a command before the end of fluctuation is received from the sub control substrate 90 (step S5003). If it is received (step 5003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the pre-reading effect display (step S5004). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes a command before the end of change, and when the command before the end of change includes pre-reading effect pattern information, reads out a predetermined pre-reading effect image from the ROM 103, and displays the image display device 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a. In addition, even if the pre-reading effect pattern information is not included in the command before the end of the fluctuation, if the preliminary image is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7, the preliminary fading effect is to fade the preliminary image. Do. On the other hand, when not having received (step S5003: NO), the above-mentioned processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a fluctuation rendering end command has been received from the sub control board 90 (step S5005). If it is received (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads out from the ROM 103 the image on which the change effect is displayed in a stopped state, and displays the changed effect stop display on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (Step S5006). On the other hand, if not received (step S5005: NO), the above process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S4545). In the other processes, for example, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives the opening effect start command, it reads out from the ROM 103 a predetermined opening effect image instructed in the opening effect start command, and displays the display screen of the image display device 7 Display on 7a. Further, when the round effect start command is received, the predetermined round effect image instructed in the round effect start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. Also, when the ending effect start command is received, the predetermined ending effect image instructed in the ending effect start command is read out from the ROM 103, displayed on the display screen 7a, and the present process is ended.

9. Operation of Image Display Device 7 FIGS. 46 to 48 are diagrams for describing the operation of the image display device 7.
The effect control microcomputer 91 movably controls the image display device 7 (the first image display device 7A, the second image display device 7B) during the game effect (display effect) or the initial operation when the power is turned on.
The first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B can be moved vertically or horizontally or rotated as shown in FIG. In addition, as shown in FIG. 47, the first image display device 7A may be arranged to cover the second image display device 7B by moving downward from above. Further, as shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 48, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are arranged adjacent to each other, using two display areas of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. Display effect is executed.

10. Operation of Movable Part (Panel Movable Body 15) FIG. 49 or FIG. 50 is a diagram for describing an operation by the movable part (panel movable body 15).
The effect control microcomputer 91 movably controls the board movable body 15 in the game effect (display effect), the initial operation at the time of power on, and the like. The movable plate 15 is at the home position in the position shown in FIG. When the movable plate 15 is moved from the home position, as shown in FIG. 49, it is unfolded in front of the image display device 7. The movable plate 15 is in the unfolded position in the position shown in FIG. When the board movable body 15 is expanded to the expanded position, the player can recognize that the character is completed. The effect control microcomputer 91 can movably control the board movable body 15 from the home position to the unfolded position. The movable board 15 is basically at the home position, and is controlled movably to the unfolded position by the effect control microcomputer 91 according to the display effect (game effect). The movable board 15 is disposed on the display screen 7a or 7b (in front of the display screen 7a or 7b) of the image display 7 when the movable position is controlled to the unfolded position. As viewed from the user, the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b is disposed at a position overlapping the predetermined area. Therefore, in this case, the board movable body 15 is in a state of blocking the predetermined area of the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b as viewed from the player. When the movable table 15 is at the home position, it does not overlap the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b.

11. An example of effects according to the present embodiment, an example of effects, a modification, and an example of an example of each effect according to the present embodiment (an example of a display effect, an example of a movable object effect). Moreover, the effect example with respect to the presentation example, a modification, and an aspect example are collectively described and demonstrated.
As described above, the effects to be described below are based on various information (such as jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, fluctuation pattern information, and prior determination information) transmitted from the gaming control microcomputer 81, the microcomputer 91 (for presentation control) This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). The following display effect examples are executed by the image display device 7 (the first image display device 7A and / or the second image display device 7B). Specifically, a display effect example in a state where the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are adjacent to each other, and the second image display device 7B is disposed below the first image display device 7A. It is. Further, when there is no particular need in the display effect example, the hold display (hold icon) is omitted.

  The hold display decorative symbol effects A to E will be described below with reference to FIGS. The on-hold display decorative symbol effect is an effect according to the change effect of the decorative symbol.

[Pending display decoration pattern effect A]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the hold display decoration symbol effect A.
First, in the on-hold display decorative symbol effect A, as shown in FIG. 51 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in variation are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the friend character CRA, the first holding icon 9A, and the second holding icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (B), reach effect A is executed. In the reach effect A, a reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R become the same symbol is represented. Specifically, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. Further, in the reach effect A, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. Reach production A includes normal reach production with relatively low jackpot expectation and super reach production with relatively high jackpot expectation. Super reach production is a production that may be developed and executed from normal reach production. In addition, in this reach production, it is a reach state with "6" symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 51C, reach effect B is executed. In the reach effect B, the decorative symbol in the reach state is continuously displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b from the reach effect A. In the reach effect B, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C displayed on the display screen 7b are moved to the display screen 7a and displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Pending display decorative symbol effect B]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the hold display decoration symbol effect B.
First, in the on-hold display decorative symbol effect B, as shown in FIG. 52 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbol in variation is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the friend character CRA, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (B), reach effect A is executed. This reach effect A is an effect to be performed during the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R have the same symbol. In the reach effect A, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, in the reach effect A, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. Reach production A includes normal reach production with relatively low jackpot expectation and super reach production with relatively high jackpot expectation. Super reach production is a production that may be developed and executed from normal reach production. In addition, in this reach production, it is a reach state with "6" symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (C), reach effect B is executed. In the reach effect B, the decorative symbol in the reach state displayed on the display screen 7a is moved to the display screen 7b and displayed on the display screen 7b. In the reach effect B, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C displayed on the display screen 7b are moved to the display screen 7a and displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Pending display decorative symbol effect C]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the hold display decoration symbol effect C.
First, in the on-hold display decorative symbol effect C, as shown in FIG. 53 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbol in variation is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the friend character CRA, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (B), reach effect A is executed. This reach effect A is an effect to be performed during the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R have the same symbol. In the reach effect A, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, in the reach effect A, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. Reach production A includes normal reach production with relatively low jackpot expectation and super reach production with relatively high jackpot expectation. Super reach production is a production that may be developed and executed from normal reach production. In addition, in this reach production, it is a reach state with "6" symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (C), reach effect B is executed. In the reach effect B, the decorative symbol in the reach state displayed on the display screen 7a is moved to the display screen 7b and displayed on the display screen 7b. In the reach effect B, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C displayed on the display screen 7b are moved to the display screen 7a and displayed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (D), reach effect C is executed. In the reach effect C, the decorative symbol in the reach state, the first hold icon 9A, the second hold icon 9C, and the friend character CRA are displayed on each of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b.

[Pending display decorative symbol effect D]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the hold display decoration symbol effect D.
First, in the on-hold display decorative symbol effect D, as shown in FIG. 54 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbol in variation is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the friend character CRA, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (B), reach effect A is executed. This reach effect A is an effect to be performed during the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R have the same symbol. In the reach effect A, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, in the reach effect A, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. Reach production A includes normal reach production with relatively low jackpot expectation and super reach production with relatively high jackpot expectation. Super reach production is a production that may be developed and executed from normal reach production. In addition, in this reach production, it is a reach state with "6" symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (C), reach effect B is executed. In the reach effect B, the decorative symbol in the reach state displayed on the display screen 7a is moved to the display screen 7b and displayed on the display screen 7b. In the reach effect B, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C displayed on the display screen 7b are moved to the display screen 7a and displayed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (D), reach effect C is executed. In this reach effect C, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C displayed on the display screen 7a move to the display screen 7b, and on the display screen 7b, the decorative symbol in the reach state and the first The hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C are displayed.

[Pending display decorative symbol effect E]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the hold display decoration symbol effect E. FIG.
First, in the on-hold display decorative symbol effect E, as shown in FIG. 55 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbol in variation is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the friend character CRA, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (B), reach effect A is executed. This reach effect A is an effect to be performed during the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R have the same symbol. In the reach effect A, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, in the reach effect A, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. Reach production A includes normal reach production with relatively low jackpot expectation and super reach production with relatively high jackpot expectation. Super reach production is a production that may be developed and executed from normal reach production. In addition, in this reach production, it is a reach state with "6" symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (C), reach effect B is executed. In the reach effect B, the decorative symbol in the reach state displayed on the display screen 7a is moved to the display screen 7b and displayed on the display screen 7b. In the reach effect B, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C displayed on the display screen 7b are moved to the display screen 7a and displayed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (D), reach effect C is executed. In this reach effect C, the decorative symbol in the reach state displayed on the display screen 7b moves to the display screen 7a, and on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbol in the reach state, the first hold icon 9A, and the first 2 Hold icon 9C is displayed.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of a pending | holding display decorative symbol production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51 to FIG. 55, when the holding icon is displayed on the display screen 7b, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed on the display screen 7a, so the interest is improved. It can be done.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 54, when the hold icon is displayed on the display screen 7b, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed on the display screen 7a, and then the display screen In 7b, the hold icon and the variable display of the decorative symbol are realized. According to this configuration, the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, when the hold icon is displayed on the display screen 7b, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not performed on the display screen 7b, and the variation of the decorative symbol on the display screen 7a When the display is being performed, the display of the hold icon is not performed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51 to FIG. 55, when the hold icon is displayed on the display screen 7b, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed on the display screen 7a, and then the display screen The hold icon displayed in 7b is moved to the display screen 7a and displayed on the display screen 7b. According to this configuration, the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51 to FIG. 55, when the hold icon is displayed on the display screen 7b, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed on the display screen 7a, and then the display screen The variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in 7a is moved to the display screen 7b and displayed on the display screen 7b. According to this configuration, the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of pending | holding display decorative symbol production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, five patterns of hold display decoration symbol effects A to E are implemented as the hold display decoration symbol effects, but the present invention is not limited to this, and An effect combining a plurality of patterns may be implemented.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are performed adjacent to each other in the hold display decorative symbol effects A to E, but the present invention is limited thereto. It is not something that can be done. For example, the first image display device 7A and / or the second image display device 7B may be moved to perform the on-hold display decorative symbol effects A to E. Further, the on-hold display decorative symbol effects A to E may be performed in a state where the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are separated by a predetermined distance.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first image display device 7A may be the main display device, and the second image display device 7B may be the sub display device, when the hold display decorative symbol effects A to E are performed. The first image display device 7A may be a sub display device, and the second image display device 7B may be a main display device. In this case, the main display device can be defined as a display device having a longer time for changing the decorative symbol than the sub display device.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect E1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
The display means comprises a first display means and a second display means different from the first display means.
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of performing display accompanied by a hold display on the first display means,
The second display effect is an effect of performing display accompanied by symbol variation display on the second display means,
There may be a combined effect including the first display effect and the second display effect.
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by
[Aspect E1-1]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1, which is
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is an effect of performing display with the hold display and the symbol variation display on the first display means,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by
[Aspect E1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2, wherein
When the first display means performs the hold display in the first display effect, no symbol variation display is performed in the first display means,
When the symbol variation display is performed by the second display means in the second display effect, the hold display is not performed by the second display means.
A game machine characterized by
[Aspect E1-4]
A game machine according to any one of modes 1 to 3, which is:
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and then the hold display performed by the first display unit is displayed as the second display Performed to move to the means,
A game machine characterized by
[Aspect E1-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4, wherein
After the second display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed in the combination effect, the symbol variation display performed by the second display means is used as the first display effect An effect of moving to the display means is performed,
A game machine characterized by

  The variable time indicator effects A to E will be described below with reference to FIGS. The fluctuation time index effect is an effect concerning the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol. The fluctuation time indicator effects A to E may be performed during a short time.

[Variable time indicator effect A]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation time indicator effect A.
First, in the fluctuation time index effect A, as shown in FIG. 56 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in variation are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the friend character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (B), an effect during variation is executed. In this fluctuating effect, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is continued on the display screen 7a, and the fluctuation end time suggestion image E2A is displayed on the display screen 7b. In this fluctuation end time suggestion image E2A, the timer value represents the time until the end of the fluctuation, that is, the fluctuation end time suggestion image E2A is the time until the end of the fluctuation (time until the fluctuation stop of the special symbol) It functions as an index that represents). In the example of FIG. 56 (B), 30 seconds is set as the initial value of the variation end time suggestion image E2A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (C), an end-of-variation effect is executed. In this variation end effect, the lost symbol array is displayed on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Further, in the effect of the end of change, it is suggested that the timer value (the time until the end of the change) of the change end time suggestion image E2A is 0 seconds on the display screen 7b, and the change is ended.

[Variable time indicator effect B]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for describing the fluctuation time indicator effect B.
First, in the fluctuation time index effect B, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in variation are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the friend character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (B), an effect during variation is performed. In this fluctuating effect, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is continued on the display screen 7a, and the fluctuation end time suggestion image E2A is displayed on the display screen 7b. The fluctuation end time suggestion image E2A includes a meter image E2AA, a cursor image E2A1, a chance up completed suggestion image E2A2, and a chance up due suggestion image E2A3. The meter image E2AA is a meter in which a meter area (represented by cross hatching in the figure) formed by the cursor image E2A1 moves from the start position to the end position, and the cursor image E2A1 moves from the start position to the end position The time until the end of the change (the time until the change stop of the special symbol) is shown. That is, the fluctuation end time suggesting image E2A functions as an index indicating the time until the end of the fluctuation. The chance-up scheduled suggestion image E2A3 is arranged on the meter image E2AA. When the cursor image E2A1 moves and the cursor image E2A1 overlaps with the chance-up scheduled suggestion image E2A3 (when it matches), the chance-up effect may be executed. When the chance-up presentation is executed, the chance-up scheduled suggestion image E2A3 is changed to the chance-up suggested suggestion image E2A2. The chance up completed suggestion image E2A2 is arranged on the meter image E2 AA, and suggests that the chance up presentation has been executed at that timing.

  That is, in the meter image E2AA, when the cursor image E2A1 moves from the start position to the chance-up scheduled suggestion image E2A3, it indicates from the start of the chance-up meter effect to the timing when the chance-up effect can be performed.

  In the chance-up effect, one of the chance-up effects among the plurality of chance-up effects including the chance-up effect of the first aspect and the chance-up effect of the second aspect is selected. For example, as the chance-up effect in the first aspect, a red cut-in effect with a relatively high jackpot expectation is performed, and as a chance-up effect in the second aspect, a blue cut-in effect with a relatively low jackpot expectation Takes place.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (C), an end-of-variation effect is executed. In this variation end effect, the lost symbol array is displayed on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Further, the end of change effect suggests that the change is ended by the fact that the cursor image E2A1 of the change end time suggested image E2A has reached the end position of the meter image E2AA on the display screen 7b.

[Variable time indicator effect C]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for describing the fluctuation time indicator effect C.
First, in the fluctuation time index effect C, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in variation are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the friend character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (B), an effect during variation is executed. In this fluctuating effect, the pseudo continuous effect is executed on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbol. In this pseudo sequence effect, the pseudo sequence is expressed by the state in which the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern and the decorative pattern 8C is a predetermined logo pattern.

  The pseudo series effect is executed at the start of the change effect, during the reach effect, or the like, and it is an effect which is dressed as if the change effect is performed many times. For example, an effect that repeats the effect of starting the fluctuation of the decorative symbol and temporarily stopping it as a pseudo-series effect, an effect of repeating the effect of temporarily stopping at least a part of the predetermined symbol array of the decorative symbol, and temporarily stopping a predetermined logo An effect that repeats the effect, or a display that reminds of a pseudo sequence such as “× 2”, “× 3”, “pseudo”, etc., and an effect to execute a fluctuation effect of a decorative symbol may be performed.

  Further, in the effect during variation, the variation end time suggestion image E2A is displayed on the display screen 7b. The fluctuation end time suggestion image E2A includes a meter image E2AA, a cursor image E2A1, a chance up completed suggestion image E2A2, and a chance up due suggestion image E2A3. The meter image E2AA is a meter in which a meter area (represented by cross hatching in the figure) formed by the cursor image E2A1 moves from the start position to the end position, and the cursor image E2A1 moves from the start position to the end position Represents the time until the end of the change. That is, the fluctuation end time suggestion image E2A functions as an index indicating the time until the end of the fluctuation (the time until the fluctuation stop of the special symbol). The chance-up scheduled suggestion image E2A3 is arranged on the meter image E2AA. When the cursor image E2A1 moves and the cursor image E2A1 overlaps with the chance-up scheduled suggestion image E2A3 (when they coincide), a pseudo-sequence effect as a chance-up effect may be executed. When the pseudo-series effect (chance-up effect) is executed, the chance-up scheduled suggestion image E2A3 is changed to the chance-up suggested suggestion image E2A2. The chance-up suggested suggestion image E2A2 is arranged on the meter image E2AA, and it is suggested that the pseudo-series rendering (chance-up rendering) has been executed at that timing.

  That is, in the meter image E2AA, by moving the cursor image E2A1 from the start position to the chance-up scheduled suggestion image E2A3, it represents from the start of the chance-up meter effect to the timing when the pseudo-series effect (chance-up effect) can be performed. There is.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (C), an end-of-variation effect is executed. In this variation end effect, the lost symbol array is displayed on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Further, the end of change effect suggests that the change is ended by the fact that the cursor image E2A1 of the change end time suggested image E2A has reached the end position of the meter image E2AA on the display screen 7b.

[Variable time indicator effect D]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for describing the fluctuation time indicator effect D.
First, in the fluctuation time index effect D, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in variation are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the friend character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), the effect A during variation is executed. In this fluctuation effect A, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is continued on the display screen 7a, and the fluctuation end time suggestion image E2A is displayed on the display screen 7b. The fluctuation end time suggestion image E2A includes a meter image E2AA, a cursor image E2A1, a chance up completed suggestion image E2A2, and a chance up due suggestion image E2A3. The meter image E2AA is a meter in which a meter area (represented by cross hatching in the figure) formed by the cursor image E2A1 moves from the start position to the end position, and the cursor image E2A1 moves from the start position to the end position Represents the time until the end of the change. That is, the fluctuation end time suggestion image E2A functions as an index indicating the time until the end of the fluctuation (the time until the fluctuation stop of the special symbol). The chance-up scheduled suggestion image E2A3 is arranged on the meter image E2AA. When the cursor image E2A1 moves and the cursor image E2A1 overlaps with the chance-up scheduled suggestion image E2A3 (when it matches), the chance-up effect may be executed. When the chance-up presentation is executed, the chance-up scheduled suggestion image E2A3 is changed to the chance-up suggested suggestion image E2A2. The chance up completed suggestion image E2A2 is arranged on the meter image E2 AA, and suggests that the chance up presentation has been executed at that timing.

  That is, in the meter image E2AA, when the cursor image E2A1 moves from the start position to the chance-up scheduled suggestion image E2A3, it indicates from the start of the chance-up meter effect to the timing when the chance-up effect can be performed.

  In the chance-up effect, one of the chance-up effects among the plurality of chance-up effects including the chance-up effect of the first aspect and the chance-up effect of the second aspect is selected. For example, as the chance-up effect of the first aspect, background rendering with a red background with a relatively high jackpot expectation is performed, and as the chance-up effect of the second aspect, a blue background with a relatively low jackpot expectation The background production to be done is performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (C), the effect B during variation is executed. In this fluctuating effect, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is continued on the display screen 7a, and the fluctuation end time suggestion image E2A is displayed on the display screen 7b. In the fluctuation end time suggestion image E2A of the display screen 7b, the cursor image E2A1 of the effect A during fluctuation is changed to the cursor image E2A11. The cursor image E2A11 has a larger cursor image than the cursor image E2A1 of the effect A during variation. The cursor image E2A11 is an image that indicates a chance up (an image that indicates that the jackpot expectation is high). Therefore, the on-the-fly presentation B is a chance up presentation compared to the on-the-fly presentation A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (D), an end-of-variation effect is executed. In this variation end effect, the lost symbol array is displayed on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Further, the end of change effect suggests that the change is ended by the fact that the cursor image E2A1 of the change end time suggested image E2A has reached the end position of the meter image E2AA on the display screen 7b. In this fluctuation end effect, the cursor image is returned to the cursor image E2A1.

[Variable time indicator effect E]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation time indicator effect E.
In the fluctuation time indicator effect B, the first image display device 7A (display screen 7a) and the second image display device 7B (display screen 7b) are executed as image display devices. It is executed only on the first image display device 7A (display screen 7a). Note that this fluctuation time index effect E may be performed only on the second image display device 7B.

  First, in the fluctuation time index effect E, as shown in FIG. 60A, a fluctuation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in variation and the friend character CRA are displayed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), an effect during variation is executed. In this in-fluctuating effect, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is continued on the display screen 7a, and the fluctuation end time suggestion image E2A is displayed. The fluctuation end time suggestion image E2A includes a meter image E2AA, a cursor image E2A1, a chance up completed suggestion image E2A2, and a chance up due suggestion image E2A3. The meter image E2AA is a meter in which a meter area (represented by cross hatching in the figure) formed by the cursor image E2A1 moves from the start position to the end position, and the cursor image E2A1 moves from the start position to the end position The time until the end of the change (the time until the change stop of the special symbol) is shown. That is, the fluctuation end time suggesting image E2A functions as an index indicating the time until the end of the fluctuation. The chance-up scheduled suggestion image E2A3 is arranged on the meter image E2AA. When the cursor image E2A1 moves and the cursor image E2A1 overlaps with the chance-up scheduled suggestion image E2A3 (when it matches), the chance-up effect may be executed. When the chance-up presentation is executed, the chance-up scheduled suggestion image E2A3 is changed to the chance-up suggested suggestion image E2A2. The chance up completed suggestion image E2A2 is arranged on the meter image E2 AA, and suggests that the chance up presentation has been executed at that timing.

  That is, in the meter image E2AA, when the cursor image E2A1 moves from the start position to the chance-up scheduled suggestion image E2A3, it indicates from the start of the chance-up meter effect to the timing when the chance-up effect can be performed.

  In the chance-up effect, one of the chance-up effects among the plurality of chance-up effects including the chance-up effect of the first aspect and the chance-up effect of the second aspect is selected. For example, as the chance-up effect in the first aspect, a red cut-in effect with a relatively high jackpot expectation is performed, and as a chance-up effect in the second aspect, a blue cut-in effect with a relatively low jackpot expectation Takes place.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (C), an end-of-variation effect is executed. In this variation end effect, the lost symbol array is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the display screen 7a, and the cursor image E2A1 of the variation end time suggestion image E2A has reached the end position of the meter image E2AA. , Suggesting that the change ends.
[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of fluctuation time index production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56 to FIG. 60, the time until the end of the fluctuation during the fluctuation of the decorative symbol (during the fluctuation of the special symbol) (the time until the fluctuation stop of the special symbol) An effect of displaying an index representing) is executed. According to this configuration, the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56 to FIG. 60, the index indicating the time until the end of the fluctuation (the time until the fluctuation stop of the special symbol) includes a cursor image, and the cursor image Represents the time until the end of the fluctuation (the time until the fluctuation stop of the special symbol) by moving to the end position of the meter image. According to this configuration, the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, an indicator representing the time until the end of the fluctuation (the time until the fluctuation stop of the special symbol) is displayed in the pseudo-series effect using the decoration symbol The presentation is performed. According to this configuration, the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, the fluctuation end time suggestion image E2A is used as an index indicating the time until the fluctuation ends (the time until the fluctuation stop of the special symbol), In the variation end time suggestion image E2A, the cursor image may be relatively small or large, and when the cursor image is large, the jackpot expectation is relatively large as compared to the case where the cursor image is small. It has a high configuration. According to this configuration, the interest can be improved.
Moreover, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, the fluctuation end time suggestion image E2A is used as an index indicating the time until the fluctuation ends (the time until the fluctuation stop of the special symbol). In the variation end time suggesting image E2A, the chance-up scheduled suggestion image E2A3 is displayed to indicate that a chance-up effect (pseudo-series effect) is to be performed. According to this configuration, the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 to 60, the variable time indicator effects A to E can be executed in a short time. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest during the short time.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of fluctuation time index production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, five patterns of fluctuation time index effects A to E are implemented as the fluctuation time index effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and among the patterns A to E An effect combining a plurality of patterns may be implemented.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are performed adjacent to each other in the fluctuation time indicator effects A to D, but the present invention is limited to this. It is not a thing. For example, the first image display device 7A and / or the second image display device 7B may be moved to perform the fluctuation time indicator effects A to D. In addition, the variable time indicator presentation effects A to D may be performed while the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are separated by a predetermined distance.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the variable time indicator effects A to D are performed, the first image display device 7A may be the main display device, and the second image display device 7B may be the sub display device. The first image display device 7A may be a sub display device, and the second image display device 7B may be a main display device. In this case, the main display device can be defined as a display device having a longer time for changing the decorative symbol than the sub display device.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, by changing from the cursor image E2A1 to the cursor image E2A11 by the fluctuation time indicator effect D, although it is considered as a chance-up effect, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as an aspect of chance-up effect, the color of the cursor image may be changed, or the cursor image may be changed to another character (such as a premium character).

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the fluctuation time indicator effects A to E, using the fluctuation end time suggestion image E2A, the time until the end of the fluctuation (time to the fluctuation stop of the special symbol) is suggested. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be made to indicate the time to the end of change corresponding to a predetermined hold (time until the change of the special symbol corresponding to a predetermined hold is stopped) among the held changes.

[Aspect E2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects and special symbol variation display means for varyingly displaying special symbols,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of fluctuating display of a decorative symbol,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying an index representing the end time of change of the special symbol during the change of the special symbol,
There may be a combined effect including the first display effect and the second display effect.
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect E2-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect E2-1,
The index includes a cursor indication, and the variation indication time of the special symbol is represented by moving the cursor indication to the end position,
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect E2-3]
A game machine according to aspect E2-1 or aspect E2-2.
The first display effect is an effect including a pseudo-rendering effect using the decorative symbol,
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect E2-4]
A game machine according to any one of modes E2-1 to E2-3, wherein
The display mode of the index in the second display effect includes a first display mode and a second display mode different from the first display mode, and suggests a chance increase by the display mode of the index. In the case of the second display mode, the jackpot expectation is higher than in the first display mode.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect E2-5]
A game machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-4, wherein
The combination effect is performed when the gaming state is short.
A game machine characterized by

  The decorative symbol effects A to E will be described below with reference to FIGS. This decorative symbol effect is an effect concerning the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol.

[Adorning design effect A]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol effect A.
First, in the decorative symbol effect A, as shown in FIG. 61 (A), reach effect is executed. In this reach effect, on the display screen 7b, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R become the same symbol, and a reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C is in motion is displayed. In the reach effect, on the display screen 7a, fluctuation effects of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R are performed. The decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R include a left decorative symbol 9L, a central decorative symbol 9C, and a right decorative symbol 9R. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are larger than the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R. Reach production includes normal reach production with relatively low jackpot expectation and super reach production with relatively high jackpot expectation. Super reach production is a production that may be developed and executed from normal reach production. In the reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are in the reach state with the "7" symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (B), a jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification effect, a jackpot symbol arrangement using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is shown on the display screen 7b. In FIG. 61 (B), the big hit symbol arrangement using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is a square pattern of seven patterns. In the jackpot notification effect, a jackpot symbol arrangement using the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R is shown on the display screen 7a. In FIG. 61 (B), the big hit symbol arrangement using the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R is also arranged in the same way as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the slats of the seven symbols are aligned.

  The decorative symbol effects A to E will be described below with reference to FIGS. This decorative symbol effect is an effect concerning the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol.

[Decorative design effect B]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol effect B.
First, in the decorative symbol effect B, as shown in FIG. 62 (A), reach effect is executed. In this reach effect, on the display screen 7b, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R become the same symbol, and a reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C is in motion is displayed. In the reach effect, on the display screen 7a, fluctuation effects of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R are performed. The decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R include a left decorative symbol 9L, a central decorative symbol 9C, and a right decorative symbol 9R. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are larger than the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R. Reach production includes normal reach production with relatively low jackpot expectation and super reach production with relatively high jackpot expectation. Super reach production is a production that may be developed and executed from normal reach production. In the reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are in the reach state with the "7" symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), a jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification effect, a jackpot symbol arrangement using the decoration symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is shown on the display screen 7a, and a jackpot symbol arrangement using the decoration symbols 9L, 9C, 9R is shown. The big hit symbol arrangement using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is a Zoro grid of 7 symbols. In addition, the big hit design which uses the decoration design 9L, 9C and 9R also becomes the zoro mesh of the 7 design just like the decoration design 8L, 8C and 8R.

[Decorative design effect C]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol effect C.
First, in the decorative symbol effect C, as shown in FIG. 63 (A), reach effect is executed. In this reach effect, on the display screen 7b, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R become the same symbol, and a reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C is in motion is displayed. In the reach effect, on the display screen 7a, fluctuation effects of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R are performed. The decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R include a left decorative symbol 9L, a central decorative symbol 9C, and a right decorative symbol 9R. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are larger than the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R. Reach production includes normal reach production with relatively low jackpot expectation and super reach production with relatively high jackpot expectation. Super reach production is a production that may be developed and executed from normal reach production. In the reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are in the reach state with the "7" symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), a jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification effect, a jackpot symbol arrangement using the decoration symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is shown on the display screen 7a, and a jackpot symbol arrangement using the decoration symbols 9L, 9C, 9R is shown. The big hit symbol arrangement using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is a Zoro grid of 7 symbols. In addition, the big hit design which uses the decoration design 9L, 9C and 9R, the decoration design 8L, 8C and 8R has become gauze meshing of the 6 design which differs from design.

[Decorative design effect D]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol effect D.
First, in the decorative symbol effect D, as shown in FIG. 64 (A), reach effect is executed. In this reach effect, on the display screen 7b, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R become the same symbol, and a reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C is in motion is displayed. In the reach effect, on the display screen 7a, fluctuation effects of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R are performed. The decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R include a left decorative symbol 9L, a central decorative symbol 9C, and a right decorative symbol 9R. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are larger than the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R. Reach production includes normal reach production with relatively low jackpot expectation and super reach production with relatively high jackpot expectation. Super reach production is a production that may be developed and executed from normal reach production. In the reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are in the reach state with the "6" symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), a jackpot notification effect A is executed. In this jackpot notification effect A, on the display screen 7b, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is temporarily stopped, and a jackpot symbol arrangement using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is shown. In FIG. 64 (B), the big hit symbol arrangement using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is a square pattern of six patterns. Further, in the jackpot notification effect A, the fluctuation effects of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R are continued on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (C), a jackpot notification effect B is executed. In the jackpot notification effect B, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are re-varied on the display screen 7b. Further, in the jackpot notification effect B, the fluctuation effects of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C and 9R are continued on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (D), a jackpot notification effect C is executed. In the jackpot notification effect C, the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is stopped on the display screen 7b, and a jackpot symbol arrangement using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is shown. In FIG. 64 (D), the big hit symbol arrangement using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is not six patterns, but seven lines of square patterns. Further, in the jackpot notification effect C, the fluctuation effects of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R are continued on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (E), the jackpot notification effect D is executed. In the jackpot notification effect D, a jackpot symbol arrangement using the decoration symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is continuously shown on the display screen 7b. Further, in the jackpot notification effect D, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R is stopped on the display screen 7a, and the jackpot symbol arrangement using the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R is shown. In FIG. 64 (E), the big hit symbol arrangement using the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R is also a square pattern of 7 symbols similar to the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Embedded design effect E]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol effect E.
First, in the decorative symbol effect A, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), reach effect is executed. In this reach effect, in the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R become the same symbol, and the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C is changing is represented, and the variable effects of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R are performed. The decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R include a left decorative symbol 9L, a central decorative symbol 9C, and a right decorative symbol 9R. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are larger than the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R. Reach production includes normal reach production with relatively low jackpot expectation and super reach production with relatively high jackpot expectation. Super reach production is a production that may be developed and executed from normal reach production. In the reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are in the reach state with the "7" symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), a jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification effect, a jackpot symbol arrangement using the decoration symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is shown on the display screen 7a, and a jackpot symbol arrangement using the decoration symbols 9L, 9C, 9R is shown. In FIG. 65 (B), the big hit symbol arrangement using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is a square pattern of 7 symbols, and the big hit symbol arrangement using the decorative symbols 9L, 9C and 9R is also the decorative symbol 8L , 8C, and 8R, it is a match of Zoro 7 pattern.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of a decorative symbol production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 65, in the jackpot notification effect after reach production, notification of the jackpot by stopping in the jackpot symbol mode using the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R When doing, it is the structure which performs notification of a big hit by making it stop by a big hit symbol mode using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R larger than the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by changing the design.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 65, after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R are varied, the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R are being varied. Temporarily stop the change of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and then change the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R again to change the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and 9L, 9C, 9R. After the decoration symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display unit 10 in a fixed stop manner, the decoration symbols 9L, 9C, 9R are displayed on the stop. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by changing the design.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61 to FIG. 65, in the case of a big hit, the decision stop aspect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decision stop aspect of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R Both have become the aspect showing a big hit. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by stopping the decorative symbol.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61 to FIG. 62 and FIG. 64 to FIG. 65, the decision stop aspect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decision stop aspect of the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R Both are in the same manner. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by stopping the decorative symbol.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64, the display effect by the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R is performed on the display screen 7a, and the display effect by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is the display screen 7a And the display screen 7b. According to this configuration, since different decorative symbols may be used depending on the display device, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of decorative symbol production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, five patterns of decorative symbol effects A to E are implemented as decorative symbol effects, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of patterns A to E An effect combining patterns may be implemented.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are adjacent to each other in the decorative symbol effects A to D, but the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, the first image display device 7A and / or the second image display device 7B may be moved to perform the decorative symbol effects A to D. Further, the on-hold display decorative symbol effects A to D may be performed in a state where the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are separated by a predetermined distance.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the decorative symbol effects A to D are performed, the first image display device 7A may be the main display device, and the second image display device 7B may be the sub display device. The image display device 7A may be a sub display device, and the second image display device 7B may be a main display device. In this case, the main display device can be defined as a display device having a longer time for changing the decorative symbol than the sub display device.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as the decorative symbol effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R or the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R may be displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R stop as finalized decorative symbol effects, the jackpot symbol is configured, but the present invention However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 9L, 9C, 9R are to be determined and stopped, they may be in the form of a disengaging symbol to inform disengaging.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect D1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of notifying the presence or absence of a jackpot by changing the first symbol and stopping it in a predetermined symbol form,
The second display effect is an effect of notifying of the presence or absence of a big hit by changing a second symbol larger than the first symbol and stopping it in a predetermined symbol form,
There may be a combined effect including the first display effect and the second display effect.
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1, which is
In the combination effect, after changing the first symbol and the second symbol, the change of the second symbol is temporarily stopped during the change of the first symbol, and then the second symbol is changed. The symbol is changed again, the first symbol and the second symbol are changed, and the second symbol is displayed on the fixed stop, and then the first symbol is stopped and displayed.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect D1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2, wherein
In the combination effect, in the case of the jackpot, the aspect of the fixed stop display of the second symbol and the aspect of the stop display of the first symbol are both the aspect representing a jackpot,
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect D1-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect 2 or aspect, wherein
In the combination effect, the mode of the fixed stop display of the second symbol and the mode of the stop display of the first symbol are the same mode,
A game machine characterized by
[Aspect D1-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4, wherein
The display means comprises a first display means and a second display means different from the first display means.
The first display effect is performed by the first display means,
The second display effect is performed using the first display means and the second display effect.
A game machine characterized by

  Mode change effects A to E will be described below with reference to FIGS. This mode change effect is an effect concerning the change effect of the decorative symbol.

[Mode change effect A]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the mode change effect A.
First, in the mode change effect A, as shown in FIG. 66 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in variation are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the friend character CRA, the select button image BTNS, and the mode display image D2A are displayed on the display screen 7b. The select button image BTNS is an image representing the select button 68, in other words, an image for prompting the player to operate the select button 68. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of mode effects may be performed in the display effect. The mode display image D2A is an image representing a mode in the mode effect. In the example of FIG. 66 (A), the mode display image D2A indicates that the mode effect is mode A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), mode select effect is executed. In this mode selection effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R being changed are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and the upper or lower key of the select button image BTNS (hereinafter also referred to as the upper and lower keys) by the player. Mode is switched, and a new mode is indicated in the mode display image D2A of the display screen 7b. In the example of FIG. 66 (B), mode B is shown as a new mode in the mode display image D2A.

  The upper and lower keys of the select button image BTNS shown in the figure may be displayed in a predetermined manner so as to be differentiated from the left key or the right key (hereinafter, these are also referred to as left and right keys). For example, the left and right keys may be displayed in white, and the up and down keys may be displayed in red.

[Mode change effect B]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the mode change effect B.
First, in the mode change effect B, as shown in FIG. 67 (A), the change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in variation are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the friend character CRA, the select button image BTNS, and the mode display image D2A are displayed on the display screen 7b. The select button image BTNS is an image representing the select button 68, in other words, an image for prompting the player to operate the select button 68. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of mode effects may be performed in the display effect. The mode display image D2A is an image representing a mode in the mode effect. In the example of FIG. 67A, the mode display image D2A indicates that the mode effect is mode A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), mode select effect is executed. In this mode selection effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R being changed are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and the mode is switched by the player operating the up and down keys of the select button image BTNS, and the display screen 7b In the mode display image D2A, a new mode is shown. In the example of FIG. 67 (B), mode B is shown as a new mode in the mode display image D2A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (C), a button reach effect is performed. In this button reach effect, on the display screen 7a, a reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are the same symbol is shown. Further, in this button reach effect, on the display screen 7b, the select button image BTNS and the mode display image D2A are continuously displayed, and the button image BTN is displayed. The button image BTN represents the effect button 63. In other words, the button image BTN is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. Button reach production includes normal reach production with relatively low jackpot expectation and super reach production with relatively high jackpot expectation. Super reach production is a production that may be developed and executed from normal reach production. In addition, in this button reach production, it is a reach state by "6" symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (D), an effect completion effect is executed. In this feature completion effect, when the player operates the effect button 63, the movable panel 15 moves to the unfolded position and is positioned in front of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, and the completion of the role is completed. Can impress the player.

[Mode change effect C]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the mode change effect C.
First, in the mode change effect C, as shown in FIG. 68 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in variation are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the friend character CRA, the select button image BTNS, and the mode display image D2A are displayed on the display screen 7b. The select button image BTNS is an image representing the select button 68, in other words, an image for prompting the player to operate the select button 68. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of mode effects may be performed in the display effect. The mode display image D2A is an image representing a mode in the mode effect. In the example of FIG. 68A, the mode display image D2A indicates that the mode effect is mode A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), mode select effect is executed. In this mode selection effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R being changed are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and the mode is switched by the player operating the select button image BTNS, and the mode display of the display screen 7b In image D2A, a new mode is shown. In the example of FIG. 68 (B), mode B is shown as a new mode in the mode display image D2A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 68C, a volume change presentation is performed. In this volume change effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the variation are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. In the volume change effect, on the display screen 7b, the select button image BTNS and the mode display image D2A are continuously displayed, and the volume operation image D2B is displayed. The volume control image D2B represents volume information corresponding to the current volume of the gaming machine 1. The volume information represented by the volume operation image D2B is changed by the player operating the left and right keys of the select button image BTNS.

[Mode change effect D]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the mode change effect D.
First, in the mode change effect D, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), the change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in variation are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the friend character CRA, the select button image BTNS, and the mode display image D2A are displayed on the display screen 7b. The select button image BTNS is an image representing the select button 68, in other words, an image for prompting the player to operate the select button 68. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of mode effects may be performed in the display effect. The mode display image D2A is an image representing a mode in the mode effect. In the example of FIG. 69A, the mode display image D2A indicates that the mode effect is mode A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), mode select effect is executed. In this mode selection effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R being changed are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and the mode is switched by the player operating the select button image BTNS, and the mode display of the display screen 7b In image D2A, a new mode is shown. In the example of FIG. 69 (B), the mode B is shown as a new mode in the mode display image D2A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 69C, a light amount change effect is performed. In this light amount change effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the variation are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, in this light amount change effect, on the display screen 7b, the select button image BTNS and the mode display image D2A are continuously displayed, and the light amount operation image D2C is displayed. The light amount operation image D2C represents light amount information corresponding to the current light amount of the image display device 7. The light amount information represented by the light amount operation image D2C is changed by the player operating the left and right keys of the select button image BTNS.

[Mode change effect E]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the mode change effect E.
First, in the mode change effect E, as shown in FIG. 70 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in variation are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the friend character CRA, the select button image BTNS, and the mode display image D2A are displayed. The select button image BTNS is an image representing the select button 68, in other words, an image for prompting the player to operate the select button 68. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of mode effects may be performed in the display effect. The mode display image D2A is an image representing a mode in the mode effect. In the example of FIG. 70 (A), the mode display image D2A shows that the mode effect is mode A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), mode select effect is executed. In this mode selection effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R being changed are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and the mode is switched by the player operating the up and down keys of the select button image BTNS, and the mode display image In D2A, a new mode is shown. In the example of FIG. 70 (B), mode B is shown as a new mode in the mode display image D2A.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of mode change production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66 to FIG. 70, the select button image BTNS is displayed during variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and one of plural types of game modes The mode display image D2A that indicates that the operation is being performed is displayed, and the select button image BTNS and the mode display image D2A are displayed in association with each other. According to this configuration, since the select button image BTNS and the mode display image D2A are associated with each other and displayed while the decorative symbol is changing, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, when the select button image BTNS and the mode display image D2A are displayed in association with each other, the button image BTN is displayed, and the player performs the effect button When 63 is operated, a feature completion effect is performed. According to this configuration, the button image BTN is displayed when the select button image BTNS and the mode display image D2A are displayed in association with each other while the decorative symbol is changing, so that the interest of the game is improved. Can.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 70, the game mode is performed by the player operating the select button image BTNS within a predetermined time from the start of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Is configured to be changed. According to this configuration, since the game mode is changed while the decorative symbol is fluctuating, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, when the select button image BTNS and the mode display image D2A are displayed in association with each other, the volume operation image D2B is displayed, and the volume operation image D2B is displayed. Is displayed in association with the select button image BTNS. According to this configuration, since the volume operation image D2B is displayed, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, when the select button image BTNS and the mode display image D2A are displayed in association with each other, the light amount operation image D2C is displayed, and the light amount operation image D2C is displayed. Is displayed in association with the select button image BTNS. According to this configuration, since the light amount operation image D2C is displayed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of mode change production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, five patterns of mode change effect effects A to E are implemented as mode change effects, but the present invention is not limited to this and a plurality of A to E You may make it implement the production which combined the pattern of.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the mode change effects A to D, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are performed adjacent to each other, but the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, the mode change effects A to D may be performed by moving the first image display device 7A and / or the second image display device 7B. In addition, the mode change effects A to D may be performed in a state where the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are separated by a predetermined distance.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the mode change effects A to D are performed, the first image display device 7A may be the main display device, and the second image display device 7B may be the sub display device. The image display device 7A may be a sub display device, and the second image display device 7B may be a main display device. In this case, the main display device can be defined as a display device having a longer time for changing the decorative symbol than the sub display device.

[Modification 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the mode change effect D, the volume operation image D2B is displayed during the change effect of the decorative symbol, and in the mode change effect E, the light amount operation image D2C is displayed during the change effect of the decoration symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the volume operation image D2B and the light amount operation image D2C may be displayed in association with the select button image BTNS while the decorative symbol is changing. In this case, the volume operation image D2B and the light amount operation image D2C may be selected by the effect button 63 so that the volume or the light amount can be changed. Further, the game mode, the volume, and the light amount may be changed by the select button 68.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timing at which the game mode can be changed by operating the select button 68 in the mode change effect may be performed within a predetermined time from the start of the change of the decorative symbol, or the change pattern. It may be different for each.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the game mode is changed by the select button 68 in the mode change effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be changed by the effect button 63.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect D2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects and a first operation unit operable by a player,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a first operation unit image representing the first operation unit while the decorative symbol is changing,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a mode suggestion image that suggests that the mode is being executed in one of a plurality of game modes while the decorative symbol is changing,
There may be a combined effect including the first display effect and the second display effect.
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and the first operation unit image and the mode suggesting image are displayed in association with each other.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect D2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1, which is
A second operation unit operable by the player;
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
In the third display effect, a second operation portion image representing the second operation portion is displayed during reach effect,
The combination effect is an effect that may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, when the first operation unit image and the mode suggestion image are displayed in association with each other, the third display effect is performed, and the player operates the second operation unit. And a predetermined effect is performed,
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect D2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2, wherein
When the first display effect and the second display effect are performed by the combination effect, the first operation unit is operated by the player within a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol The game mode is changed from the game mode corresponding to the mode suggestion image displayed in the second display effect to another game mode.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect D2-4]
A game machine according to any one of modes 1 to 3, which is:
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect of displaying volume information representing a volume in a game during fluctuation of the decorative symbol,
In the combination effect, when the first operation unit image and the mode suggestion image are displayed in association with each other, the fourth display effect is performed, and the volume information includes the first operation unit image Is displayed in association with
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect D2-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4, wherein
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is an effect of displaying light amount information representing a light amount during a game while the decorative symbol is changing,
In the combined effect, the fifth display effect is performed when the first operation unit image and the mode suggestion image are displayed in association with each other, and the light amount information includes the first operation unit image Is displayed in association with
A game machine characterized by

  The jackpot end effects A to E will be described below with reference to FIGS. The jackpot end effect is an effect at the end of the jackpot game.

[Big win end effect A]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for describing the jackpot end effect A.
First, in the jackpot end effect A, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), a mode selection effect is executed. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of mode effects may be executed in the display effect after the big hit game. In this mode selection effect, the display screen 7a is divided into three on the display screen 7a as a display for selecting a mode after the big hit game, and the mode A, mode B or mode C is suggested in the divided area. Display. In the mode selection effect, the friend character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), an alerting effect is performed. In this alerting effect, the mode suggestion image D3A is displayed on the display screen 7a. The mode suggestion image D3A is an image that suggests a mode after a jackpot game, and specifically, an image that suggests a mode selected in the mode selection effect. Further, in this alerting effect, an alerting image D3B is displayed on the display screen 7b. The alert image D3B is an image for alerting the player not to forget the belongings, and represents the wording "Please be careful not to forget your belongings!".

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71C, the mode effect is performed. In this mode effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in change are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the mode suggestion image D3C is displayed. The mode suggestion image D3C in FIG. 71C indicates that the mode is mode B. In the mode effect, the friend character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

[Big win end effect B]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for describing the jackpot end effect B.
First, in the jackpot end effect B, as shown in FIG. 72A, a mode selection effect is executed. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of mode effects may be executed in the display effect after the big hit game. In this mode selection effect, the display screen 7a is divided into three on the display screen 7a as a display for selecting a mode after the big hit game, and the mode A, mode B or mode C is suggested in the divided area. Display. In the mode selection effect, the friend character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), an alerting effect is performed. In this alerting effect, the mode suggestion image D3A is displayed on the display screen 7a. The mode suggestion image D3A is an image that suggests a mode after a jackpot game, and specifically, an image that suggests a mode selected in the mode selection effect. Further, in this alerting effect, an alerting image D3D is displayed on the display screen 7b. The alert image D3D is an image for alerting the player that the property is not stolen, and represents a word that "Be careful not to be stolen of your property!" ing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (C), a mode effect is performed. In this mode effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in change are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the mode suggestion image D3C is displayed. In the mode suggestion image D3C of FIG. 72 (C), it is represented that the mode is mode B. In the mode effect, the friend character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

[Big win end effect C]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot end effect C.
First, in the jackpot end effect C, as shown in FIG. 73 (A), a mode selection effect is executed. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of mode effects may be executed in the display effect after the big hit game. In this mode selection effect, the display screen 7a is divided into three on the display screen 7a as a display for selecting a mode after the big hit game, and the mode A, mode B or mode C is suggested in the divided area. Display. In the mode selection effect, the friend character CRA and the button image BTN are displayed on the display screen 7b. The button image BTN represents the effect button 63, and is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63 to prompt selection of a mode displayed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), an alerting effect is performed. In this alerting effect, the mode suggestion image D3A is displayed on the display screen 7a. The mode suggestion image D3A is an image that suggests a mode after a jackpot game, and specifically, an image that suggests a mode selected in the mode selection effect. Further, in this alerting effect, an alerting image D3B is displayed on the display screen 7b. The alert image D3B is an image for alerting the player not to forget the belongings, and represents the wording "Please be careful not to forget your belongings!".

  Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (C), a mode effect is performed. In this mode effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in change are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the mode suggestion image D3C is displayed. The mode suggestion image D3C in FIG. 73C indicates that the mode is mode B. In the mode effect, the friend character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

[Big win end effect D]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for describing the jackpot end effect D.
First, in the jackpot end effect D, as shown in FIG. 74 (A), a mode selection effect is executed. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of mode effects may be executed in the display effect after the big hit game. In this mode selection effect, the display screen 7a is divided into three on the display screen 7a as a display for selecting a mode after the big hit game, and the mode A, mode B or mode C is suggested in the divided area. Display. In the mode selection effect, the friend character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (B), an alerting effect is performed. In this alerting effect, the mode suggestion image D3A is displayed on the display screen 7a. The mode suggestion image D3A is an image that suggests a mode after a jackpot game, and specifically, an image that suggests a mode selected in the mode selection effect. Further, in this alerting effect, an alerting image D3B is displayed on the display screen 7b. The alert image D3B is an image for alerting the player not to forget the belongings, and represents the wording "Please be careful not to forget your belongings!".

  Next, as shown in FIG. 74C, maker logo effect is executed. In this maker logo effect, a maker logo image D3E is displayed on the display screen 7a. The maker logo image D3E represents the logo of the maker of the gaming machine 1. The present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined logo may be displayed. The predetermined logo may be, for example, a logo related to the game effect of the gaming machine 1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (D), a mode effect is performed. In this mode effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in change are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the mode suggestion image D3C is displayed. The mode suggestion image D3C in FIG. 74D indicates that the mode is mode B. In the mode effect, the friend character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

[Big win end effect D]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot end effect E.
The jackpot end effect E uses only the display screen 7 a without using the display screen 7 b.
First, in the jackpot end effect E, as shown in FIG. 75 (A), the mode selection effect is executed. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of mode effects may be executed in the display effect after the big hit game. In this mode selection effect, the display screen 7a is divided into three on the display screen 7a as a display for selecting a mode after the big hit game, and the mode A, mode B or mode C is suggested in the divided area. Along with displaying, the friend character CRA is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (B), an alerting effect is performed. In this alerting effect, the mode suggestion image D3A is displayed on the display screen 7a. The mode suggestion image D3A is an image that suggests a mode after a jackpot game, and specifically, an image that suggests a mode selected in the mode selection effect. Further, in this alerting effect, an alerting image D3B is displayed on the display screen 7a. The alert image D3B is an image for alerting the player not to forget the belongings, and represents the wording "Please be careful not to forget your belongings!".

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (C), a mode effect is performed. In this mode effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in change are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the mode suggestion image D3C is displayed. In the mode suggestion image D3C of FIG. 75 (C), it is represented that the mode is mode B. Further, in the mode effect, the friend character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Example of effect]
Below, an example of the effect of the jackpot end effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71 to FIG. 75, after the mode selection effect for selecting the effect mode after the big hit game is performed, the mode suggestion image is displayed to the player. It is configured to display an alerting image that suggests a predetermined alerting. According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the disadvantage of the player by the alert information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 75, the alerting image is alerting information for the player not to forget the belongings or the player is not stolen It is an image that contains alerting information to make it happen. According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the disadvantage of the player by the alert information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71 to FIG. 75, after the mode selection effect for selecting the effect mode after the big hit game is performed, the mode suggestion image is displayed to the player. An alerting image suggesting a predetermined alerting is displayed, and then an effect in the effect mode selected in the mode selection effect is performed. According to this configuration, since the effects in the effect mode selected in the mode selection effect are performed, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, after the effect of displaying the alerting image is performed, the logo indicating the manufacturer of the gaming machine is displayed. According to this configuration, since the logo that suggests the manufacturer is displayed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, in the mode selection effect of the jackpot end effect C, a button that suggests that the player selects the effect mode after the jackpot game using the effect button 63 The image BTN is displayed, and the player selects the effect mode after the jackpot game using the effect button 63. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of jackpot end production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, five patterns of jackpot end effects A to E are implemented as jackpot end effects, but the present invention is not limited to this, and of the A to E An effect combining a plurality of patterns may be implemented.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are performed adjacent to each other in the jackpot end effects A to D, but the present invention is limited to this. It is not a thing. For example, the first image display device 7A and / or the second image display device 7B may be moved to perform jackpot end effects A to D. Further, the jackpot end effects A to D may be performed in a state where the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are separated by a predetermined distance.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the jackpot end effects A to D are performed, the first image display device 7A may be the main display device, and the second image display device 7B may be the sub display device. The first image display device 7A may be a sub display device, and the second image display device 7B may be a main display device. In this case, the main display device can be defined as a display device having a longer time for changing the decorative symbol than the sub display device.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the jackpot end effect D is performed, the maker logo image D3E is displayed by the maker logo effect, but the present invention is not limited to this and a predetermined logo, for example The logo of the manufacturer researched and developed for the gaming machine 1 and the logo of the manufacturer of the gaming machine 1 may be displayed. Moreover, the display timing of these logos may be before displaying the alerting image, or may be displayed together with the alerting image.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect D3-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a mode selection image for selecting an effect mode after the jackpot game,
The second display effect is an effect for performing display indicating the effect mode,
The third display effect is an effect of displaying an alerting image suggesting a predetermined alerting to the player,
There may be a combined effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect is performed, and the third display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect D3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1, which is
The alerting image is an image including alerting information for preventing the player from forgetting the belongings or alerting information for preventing the player from being stolen.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect D3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2, wherein
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect for performing a predetermined effect mode,
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, after the third display effect is performed, the effect mode suggested in the second display effect is performed as the fourth display effect.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect D3-4]
A game machine according to any one of modes 1 to 3, which is:
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is an effect of displaying a logo suggesting a manufacturer of a game machine,
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, after the third display effect is performed, the fifth display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect D3-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4, wherein
It has an operation unit that can be operated by the player,
The mode selection image of the first display effect is an operation unit image representing the operation unit, and the operation unit suggests that the player use the operation unit to select the effect mode after the jackpot game. In this embodiment, the player includes an image and selects the effect mode after the jackpot game using the operation unit.
A game machine characterized by

  The prize effects A to E will be described below with reference to FIGS. 76 to 80. This winning effect is an effect which takes place during a variation effect of a decorative symbol or during a jackpot game based on winning in the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21.

[Prize A]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the prize effect A.
This winning effect A is performed during the change effect of the decorative symbol, and first, as shown in FIG. 76 (A), reach effect is executed. This reach effect is an effect performed during the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R have the same symbol. In this reach effect, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, in the reach effect, the friend character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b. Reach production includes normal reach production with relatively low jackpot expectation and super reach production with relatively high jackpot expectation. Super reach production is a production that may be developed and executed from normal reach production. In addition, in this reach production, it is a reach state with "6" symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (B), a general winning opening effect is executed. In this general winning a prize opening effect, reach condition where the decoration design 8L and 8R become the same design continues in display screen 7a, general winning a prize entrance on display screen 7b on the basis of entry of the game sphere to general winning a prize opening 27 A sphere suggestion image D4A is displayed. The general winning a prize winning ball suggestion image D4A is an image showing that the gaming ball has entered the general winning prize opening 27 (winning), and the wording "Congratulations! I have a general winning prize winning!" Is shown .

[Prize B]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the prize effect B.
This prize effect B is performed during the jackpot game, and first, as shown in FIG. 77 (A), the jackpot game effect is executed. In this jackpot game effect, a round suggestion image D4B is displayed on the display screen 7a, and a state in which the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB are fighting is displayed on the display screen 7b. The round suggestion image D4B is an image that suggests the number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the word “15R” is shown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), a general winning opening effect is executed. In this general winning a prize opening effect, round suggestion picture D4B is continuously displayed in display screen 7a, general winning a prize oral entering suggestion picture D4C is displayed in display screen 7b based on the ball entry of the game ball to general winning a prize opening 29 Be done. The general winning entry winning ball suggestion image D4C is an image showing that the gaming ball has entered the general winning aperture 29 close to the large winning aperture (winning), “I will start shiritori! Yogurt ... 'To' The wording is shown. That is, in this general winning a prize opening effect, the game is started with the player being inserted by the game ball entering the regular winning opening 29.

[Prize effect C]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the prize effect C.
The prize effect C is carried out during the jackpot game, and first, as shown in FIG. 78A, the jackpot game effect is executed. In this jackpot game effect, on the display screen 7a, a round suggestion image D4B is displayed, and a pop-up suggestion image D4D is displayed. Further, in the jackpot game effect, the appearance that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are fighting is displayed on the display screen 7b. The round suggestion image D4B is an image that suggests the number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the word “15R” is shown. The disbursed ball suggestion image D4D is an image that suggests the number of gaming balls paid out to the player during the jackpot (balls that the player has won during the jackpot, hereinafter also referred to as the jackpot balls).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (B), a general winning opening effect is executed. In this general winning a prize opening effect, round suggestion picture D4B continues being displayed in display screen 7a, the large hitting out which withdrawal ball suggestion picture D4D suggests on display screen 7b on the basis of entry of the game sphere to general winning a prize opening 29 The number of balls is displayed by being increased by the payout balls corresponding to the general winning opening 29. Further, in the general winning opening effect, a state where the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are fighting on the display screen 7a is continuously displayed.

[Prize effect D]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the prize effect D. FIG.
The prize effect D is carried out during the jackpot game, and first, as shown in FIG. 79 (A), the jackpot game effect is executed. In this jackpot game effect, on the display screen 7a, a round suggestion image D4B is displayed, and a pop-up suggestion image D4D is displayed. Further, in the jackpot game effect, the appearance that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are fighting is displayed on the display screen 7b. The round suggestion image D4B is an image that suggests the number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the word “15R” is shown. The popped ball suggestion image D4D is an image that suggests the number of popping balls.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), a general winning opening effect is executed. In this general winning a prize opening effect, round suggestion picture D4B continues being displayed in display screen 7a, the large hitting out which withdrawal ball suggestion picture D4D suggests on display screen 7b on the basis of entry of the game sphere to general winning a prize opening 29 The number of balls is displayed by being increased by the payout balls corresponding to the general winning opening 29. In addition, in the general winning a prize opening effect, game state suggestion picture D4E is displayed in display screen 7a on the basis of entry of the game sphere to general winning a prize opening 29. The game state suggestion image D4E is an image that suggests the game state after the jackpot game, and the word "<next notice> probability fluctuation arrival !!" is shown. That is, in this general winning a prize opening effect, when the game ball enters the general winning opening 29, a display for adding a big hit ball is performed, and a display indicating a gaming state after a big hit game is performed.

[Prize effect E]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the prize effect E.
The winning effect E uses only the display screen 7a without using the display screen 7b.
This winning effect E is performed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol, and first, as shown in FIG. 80 (A), reach effect is executed. This reach effect is an effect performed during the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R have the same symbol. In this reach effect, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed. Reach production includes normal reach production with relatively low jackpot expectation and super reach production with relatively high jackpot expectation. Super reach production is a production that may be developed and executed from normal reach production. In addition, in this reach production, it is a reach state with "6" symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (B), a general winning opening effect is executed. In this general winning a prize opening effect, reach condition where decoration design 8L and 8R become the same design continues in display screen 7a, general winning a prize entrance entering suggestion picture D4A on the basis of entry of the game sphere to general winning a prize opening 27 Is displayed. The general winning a prize winning ball suggestion image D4A is an image showing that the gaming ball has entered the general winning prize opening 27 (winning), and the wording "Congratulations! I have a general winning prize winning!" Is shown .

  In addition, the fluctuation production (reach production) or the big hit game production of the decorative symbol is a production performed based on having won the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21. In addition, the general winning a prize opening 29 is arranged adjacent to a position closer to the first large winning a prize opening 30, 35 than the general winning a prize opening 27. The general winning opening 27 is disposed adjacent to a position closer to the first start opening 20 than the general winning opening 29.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of winning a prize design is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76 to FIG. 80, a display effect (variation effect of a decorative symbol) performed based on the ball entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21. Alternatively, when a jackpot game effect is being performed, a general winning opening effect to be performed based on the game ball entering the general winning opening is performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77 to FIG. 79, the result of the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21 is performed when the result is a big hit. When the display effect during the big hit game (big hit game effect) is performed, the general winning opening effect is performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78 to FIG. 79, the display effect (variation effect of the decorative symbol) performed based on the ball entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21. Or, when a jackpot game effect is being performed, an image (dispense suggestion image D4D) indicating a jackpot ball obtained in the jackpot game is displayed based on the game ball entering the general winning opening 29 Is configured to According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79, a display effect (variation effect of a decorative symbol or a big hit game performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21). While the effect is being performed, an image (playing state suggesting image D4E) suggesting the playing state is displayed based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the general winning opening 29. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the general winning opening 29 is disposed closer to the first large winning opening 30 than the first starting opening 20. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a prize production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, five patterns of winning effects A to E are implemented as winning effects, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of patterns of A to E A combined effect may be implemented.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are adjacent to each other in the prize effects A to D, but the present invention is limited to this. Absent. For example, the first image display device 7A and / or the second image display device 7B may be moved to perform prize effects A to E. In addition, the winning effects A to D may be performed in a state where the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are separated by a predetermined distance.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the prize effects A to D are performed, the first image display device 7A may be a main display device, and the second image display device 7B may be a sub display device. The display device 7A may be a sub display device, and the second image display device 7B may be a main display device. In this case, the main display device can be defined as a display device having a longer time for changing the decorative symbol than the sub display device.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the winning effects A and E display the general winning entry ball suggestion image D4A directly suggesting a winning on the general winning opening, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead of the image, an image may be displayed that indirectly suggests a winning on the general winning opening. For example, as an image indirectly suggesting a winning on the general winning opening, an image may be displayed that suggests the number of payout balls for the winning on the general winning opening when winning on the general winning opening. Further, as an image indirectly suggesting a winning on the general winning opening, an image for starting a predetermined effect may be displayed when winning on the general winning opening.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the prize effect B, the general prize winning ball suggestion image D4C indicating the start of shiritori is displayed, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the other You may display the image which suggests the start of presentation. For example, as an image suggesting the start of another effect, an image introducing a character, an image introducing game character, an image introducing a reach effect, an image suggesting the expectation of pre-reading effect, a jackpot of the variation You may make it display the image etc. which show an expectation degree.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect D4-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects, a starting opening for triggering a big hit lottery, and a general winning opening different from the starting opening,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a display effect to be performed based on the entry of the game ball to the start opening,
The second display effect is a display effect performed based on the entry of the game ball to the general winning opening,
There may be a combined effect including the first display effect and the second display effect.
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect D4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1, which is
The first display effect includes a display effect during a jackpot game performed when a result of the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball to the start opening is a jackpot,
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect D4-3]
The gaming machine according to the second aspect,
The second display effect is a display effect that displays an image suggesting a jackpot ball obtained in the jackpot game based on the game ball entering the general winning opening,
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect D4-4]
A game machine according to any one of modes 1 to 3, which is:
The second display effect is a display effect that displays an image suggesting a game state based on the game ball entering the general winning opening,
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect D4-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4, wherein
It is equipped with a big winning opening where the game ball can win in the big hit game,
The general winning opening is disposed closer to the big winning opening than the starting opening,
A game machine characterized by

  The hold image display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 81 to 85. The hold image display effect is performed in parallel with the change effect of the decorative symbol. In particular, when the gaming state after the jackpot is a probability variation gaming state, it is performed in parallel with the variation effect of the decorative symbol.

[Held image display effect A]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the hold image display effect A.
First, in the hold image display effect A, as shown in FIG. 81 (A), the first image display effect is executed. In the first image display effect, variation of the effect pattern is performed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. Then, the hold image 9A, the hold image 9B, and the hold digest image 9C are displayed in the lower part of the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. The reserve image 9A indicates the number of memories of the first special view reserve, and is a double heart image in which a heart is drawn in the heart. On the other hand, the hold image 9B indicates the number of memories of the second special view hold, and is a single heart image. The reserve digest image 9C corresponds to the variation, and indicates a digest of the second Tokusetsu reserve if it is a single heart image, and indicates a digest of the first Tokusetsu reserve if it is a double heart image. If both the first special view reserve and the second special view reserve are present, the second special view reserve is preferentially digested. Further, at the upper right of the display screen 7b, a display of "remaining 94 times" is made, which indicates that the probability variation gaming state continues 94 variations.

  Such a first image display effect is performed in parallel with the variation of the effect pattern, and the display of "remaining ○ times" is reduced each time the effect pattern is displayed as a fixed stop. Then, as shown in FIG. 81 (B), the first image display effect is executed until “the remaining 50 times” is reached.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81C, the second image display effect (1) is performed. In the second image display effect (1), similar to the first image display effect, the variable display of the effect symbol is performed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. Then, the hold images 9A and 9B and the hold digest image 9C are displayed in the lower part of the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. Further, “remaining ○ times” is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7b.

  The second image display effect (1) is executed from the fluctuation of the 51st rotation after the big hit. Therefore, when the variation of the effect pattern is started, the "49 remaining" display is performed. At this timing, both the reserve image 9A and the reserve image 9B change to an image of a white circle. This is an image similar to the image displayed in the normal gaming state.

[Held image display effect B]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the hold image display effect B.
First, in the hold image display effect B, as shown in FIG. 82 (A), the first image display effect is executed. In the first image display effect, variation of the effect pattern is performed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. Then, the hold image 9A, the hold image 9B, and the hold digest image 9C are displayed in the lower part of the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. The reserve image 9A indicates the number of memories of the first special view reserve, and is a double heart image in which a heart is drawn in the heart. On the other hand, the hold image 9B indicates the number of memories of the second special view hold, and is a single heart image. The reserve digest image 9C corresponds to the variation, and indicates a digest of the second Tokusetsu reserve if it is a single heart image, and indicates a digest of the first Tokusetsu reserve if it is a double heart image. If both the first special view reserve and the second special view reserve are present, the second special view reserve is preferentially digested. Further, at the upper right of the display screen 7b, a display of "remaining 94 times" is made, which indicates that the probability variation gaming state continues 94 variations.

  Such a first image display effect is performed in parallel with the variation of the effect pattern, and the display of "remaining ○ times" is reduced each time the effect pattern is displayed as a fixed stop. Then, as shown in FIG. 82 (B), the first image display effect is executed until “the remaining 50 times” is reached.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 82C, the second image display effect (2) is performed. In the second image display effect (2), unlike the first image display effect, the variable display of the effect symbol is performed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. Then, the hold images 9A and 9B and the hold digest image 9C are displayed in the lower part of the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. Further, “remaining ○ times” is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a.

  The second image display effect (2) is executed from the fluctuation of the 51st rotation after the big hit. Therefore, when the variation of the effect design is started, "49 times remaining" is displayed on the display screen 7a. At this timing, both the reserve image 9A and the reserve image 9B change to an image of a white circle. This is an image similar to the image displayed in the normal gaming state.

[Held image display effect C]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the hold image display effect C.
First, in the hold image display effect B, as shown in FIG. 83 (A), the first image display effect is executed. In the first image display effect, variable display of the effect pattern is performed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. Then, the hold image 9A and the hold digest image 9C are displayed in the lower part of the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. The reserve image 9A indicates the storage numbers of both the first special view reserve and the second special view reserve. The image showing the number of memories of the first special view reserve is a double heart image in which a heart is drawn in the heart. On the other hand, the image showing the number of memories of the second special view reserve is a single heart image. The reserve digest image 9C corresponds to the variation, and indicates a digest of the second Tokusetsu reserve if it is a single heart image, and indicates a digest of the first Tokusetsu reserve if it is a double heart image. Pending is digested in order of admission. Further, at the upper right of the display screen 7b, a display of "remaining 94 times" is made, which indicates that the probability variation gaming state continues 94 variations.

  Such a first image display effect is performed in parallel with the variation of the effect pattern, and the display of "remaining ○ times" is reduced each time the effect pattern is displayed as a fixed stop. Then, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), the first image display effect is executed until “the remaining 50 times” is reached.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83C, the second image display effect (1) is performed. In the second image display effect (1), similar to the first image display effect, the variable display of the effect symbol is performed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. Then, the hold image 9A and the hold digest image 9C are displayed in the lower part of the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. Further, “remaining ○ times” is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7b.

  The second image display effect (1) is executed from the fluctuation of the 51st rotation after the big hit. Therefore, when the variation of the effect design is started, "49 times remaining" is displayed on the display screen 7b. At this timing, both the reserve image 9A and the reserve digested image 9C change to an image of a white circle. This is an image similar to the image displayed in the normal gaming state. And at this time, it will be in the state where it can not be distinguished whether it is 1st special figure reservation or 2nd special figure reservation.

[Held image display effect D]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the hold image display effect D.
First, in the hold image display effect D, as shown in FIG. 84 (A), the first image display effect is executed. In the first image display effect, variable display of the effect pattern is performed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. Then, the hold image 9A and the hold digest image 9C are displayed in the lower part of the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. The reserve image 9A indicates the storage numbers of both the first special view reserve and the second special view reserve. The image showing the number of memories of the first special view reserve is a double heart image in which a heart is drawn in the heart. On the other hand, the image showing the number of memories of the second special view reserve is a single heart image. The reserve digest image 9C corresponds to the variation, and indicates a digest of the second Tokusetsu reserve if it is a single heart image, and indicates a digest of the first Tokusetsu reserve if it is a double heart image. Pending is digested in order of admission. Further, at the upper right of the display screen 7b, a display of "remaining 94 times" is made, which indicates that the probability variation gaming state continues 94 variations.

  Such a first image display effect is performed in parallel with the variation of the effect pattern, and the display of "remaining ○ times" is reduced each time the effect pattern is displayed as a fixed stop. Then, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), the first image display effect is executed until “the remaining 50 times” is reached.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (C), the second image display effect (2) is executed. In the second image display effect (2), unlike the first image display effect, the variable display of the effect symbol is performed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. Then, the reserve image 9A and the reserve digest image 9C are displayed in the lower part of the display screen 7a of the second image display device 7A. Further, “remaining ○ times” is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a.

  The second image display effect (2) is executed from the fluctuation of the 51st rotation after the big hit. Therefore, when the variation of the effect design is started, "49 times remaining" is displayed on the display screen 7a. At this timing, both the reserve image 9A and the reserve digested image 9C change to an image of a white circle. This is an image similar to the image displayed in the normal gaming state. And at this time, it will be in the state where it can not be distinguished whether it is 1st special figure reservation or 2nd special figure reservation.

[Held image display effect E]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the hold image display effect E.
First, in the hold image display effect D, as shown in FIG. 85 (A), the first image display effect is executed. In the first image display effect, variable display of the effect pattern is performed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. Then, the hold image 9A and the hold digest image 9C are displayed in the lower part of the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. The reserve image 9A indicates the storage numbers of both the first special view reserve and the second special view reserve. Both the image indicating the number of first special image reservations and the image indicating the number of second special image reservations are single heart images. Therefore, it is in the state which can not distinguish 1st special figure reservation and 2nd special figure reservation. Pending is digested in order of admission. Further, at the upper right of the display screen 7b, a display of "remaining 94 times" is made, which indicates that the probability variation gaming state continues 94 variations.

  Such a first image display effect is performed in parallel with the variation of the effect pattern, and the display of "remaining ○ times" is reduced each time the effect pattern is displayed as a fixed stop. Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), the first image display effect is executed until “the remaining 50 times” is reached.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85C, the second image display effect (2) is executed. In the second image display effect (2), unlike the first image display effect, the variable display of the effect symbol is performed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. Then, the reserve image 9A and the reserve digest image 9C are displayed in the lower part of the display screen 7a of the second image display device 7A. Further, “remaining ○ times” is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a.

  The second image display effect (2) is executed from the fluctuation of the 51st rotation after the big hit. Therefore, when the variation of the effect design is started, "49 times remaining" is displayed on the display screen 7a. At this timing, both the reserve image 9A and the reserve digested image 9C change to an image of a white circle. This is an image similar to the image displayed in the normal gaming state. And at this time, it will be in the state where it can not be distinguished whether it is 1st special figure reservation or 2nd special figure reservation.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect in this embodiment is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 81 to 85, the hold images 9A and 9B are made different depending on the number of rotations in the probability variation gaming state. According to this configuration, the probability variation gaming state can be sharpened, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the first image display effect is performed when the first rotation to the 50th rotation after the big hit is finished, and the hold image is displayed as the heart image as the first display mode. On the other hand, in the case of fluctuation from the 51st rotation to the 100th rotation after the end of the big hit, the second image display effect is performed, and the reserved image is displayed as a white circle image as a second display mode. According to this configuration, the probability variation gaming state can be distinguished in the first half and the second half, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, it is possible to distinguish the first special view suspension and the second special view suspension only in the first image display effect. The number of pending storages is displayed as a double heart image, and the number of pending memory for the second special view is displayed as a single heart image. As a result, the taste of the hold image is largely different between the first half and the second half of the probability variation gaming state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 82, 84 and 85, in the first image display effect, the hold image of the first display mode is displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. In contrast to the display, in the second image display device, the hold image of the second display mode is displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. According to this configuration, the taste of the hold image is largely different between the first half and the second half of the probability variation gaming state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed using the display screens 7a and 7b of the image display devices 7A and 7B on the side where the hold image is not displayed. According to this configuration, the display of the reserved image can be clearly displayed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification in this embodiment is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the second image display effect, the holding images 9A and 9B are the same as the holding images 9A and 9B in the normal gaming state. On the other hand, a hold image different from the normal gaming state may be adopted.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the change from the first rotation to the 50th rotation after the big hit is the first period, and the change from the 51st rotation to the 100th rotation is the second period to change the reserved image. The On the other hand, the hold image may be changed by dividing it into three or more periods.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed using the display screens 7a and 7b of the image display devices 7A and 7B on the side where the hold image is not displayed. On the other hand, on one of the display screens 7a and 7b, variation display of the effect design may be performed together with the display of the holding image.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect D5-1]
A display device capable of notifying of the number of holdings by the number of displayed holding images;
And a display control unit configured to control display of the reserved image on the display device.
When the gaming state is controlled to the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player, the display control means makes the display of the holding image different according to the number of rotations in the advantageous gaming state. Machine.

[Aspect D5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D5-1,
A game machine characterized in that the display control means displays the reserved image in a first display mode in a first period and in a second display mode in a second period.

[Aspect D5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D5-2,
In the display control means, in any one of the first display mode and the second display mode, the number of reservations by entering a ball from the first entrance and the number of reservations by entering the ball from the second entrance A game machine characterized by displaying a hold image that can be distinguished from and.

[Aspect D5-4]
A game machine according to any one of aspects D5-1 to D5-3, wherein
Furthermore, a plurality of the display devices are provided,
A game machine characterized in that the display control means performs the display in the first display mode on the first display device and the display in the second display mode on the second display device.

[Aspect D5-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect D5-4,
A game machine characterized by performing variable display of a rendering symbol on a display device other than the display device on which the reserved image is displayed by the display control means.

  Count effects A to E will be described below with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90. This count effect is an effect concerning the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol.

[Count effect A]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the count effect A.
This count effect A is performed during the change effect of the decorative symbol, and, first, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), reach effect is executed. This reach effect is an effect performed during the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R have the same symbol. In this reach effect, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, in the reach effect, the friend character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b. Reach production includes normal reach production with relatively low jackpot expectation and super reach production with relatively high jackpot expectation. Super reach production is a production that may be developed and executed from normal reach production. In addition, in this reach production, it is a reach state with "6" symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), countdown effect A is executed. In this countdown effect A, by moving the board movable body 15 to the unfolded position, the board movable body 15 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, and the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b are viewed from the player. The countdown display image C1A is displayed in the display area not overlapping the movable table 15. The countdown display image C1A is an image representing a countdown starting from "10". A part of the countdown display image C1A is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 86C, countdown effect B is executed. In this countdown effect B, the state in which the board movable body 15 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a and the predetermined area of the display screen 7b is continued, and the board movable body 15 is viewed from the player on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. The display of the countdown display image C1A is continued in the display area that does not overlap the display area. In FIG. 86 (C), it is shown that the countdown is progressing to “1” in the countdown display image C1A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (D), a jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification effect, the state where the board movable body 15 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b is continued, and does not overlap with the board movable body 15 when viewed from the player on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. The jackpot notification image C1B is displayed in the display area. The jackpot notification image C1B is an image indicating a jackpot to the player, and is indicated as "jackpot".

[Count effect B]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the count effect B.
This count effect B is performed during the change effect of the decorative symbol, and first, as shown in FIG. 87 (A), reach effect is executed. This reach effect is an effect performed during the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R have the same symbol. In this reach effect, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, in the reach effect, the friend character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b. Reach production includes normal reach production with relatively low jackpot expectation and super reach production with relatively high jackpot expectation. Super reach production is a production that may be developed and executed from normal reach production. In addition, in this reach production, it is a reach state with "6" symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (B), countdown effect A is executed. In this countdown effect A, by moving the board movable body 15 to the unfolded position, the board movable body 15 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a and the predetermined area of the display screen 7b, and in the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b A countdown display image C1A is displayed in a display area which does not overlap the movable plate 15 as viewed from the user. The countdown display image C1A is an image representing a countdown starting from "10". A part of the countdown display image C1A is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (C), countdown effect B is executed. In this countdown effect B, the state in which the board movable body 15 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a and the predetermined area of the display screen 7b is continued, and the board movable body 15 is viewed from the player on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. The button pressing prompt image C1C is displayed in the display area that does not overlap with the display area, and the button image BTN is displayed. The button pressing prompting image C1C is displayed after the countdown of the countdown display image C1A becomes “1”, and is an image for prompting the player to press the effect button 63. The button image BTN represents the effect button 63. In other words, the button image BTN is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (D), a jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification effect, the state in which the board movable body 15 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a and the predetermined area of the display screen 7b is continued, and the board movable body 15 is viewed from the player on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. The jackpot notification image C1B is displayed in the display area that does not overlap the display area. The jackpot notification image C1B is an image indicating a jackpot to the player, and is indicated as "jackpot".

[Count effect C]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the count effect C.
This count effect C is performed during the change effect of the decorative symbol, and, first, as shown in FIG. 88 (A), reach effect is executed. This reach effect is an effect performed during the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R have the same symbol. In this reach effect, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, in the reach effect, the friend character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b. Reach production includes normal reach production with relatively low jackpot expectation and super reach production with relatively high jackpot expectation. Super reach production is a production that may be developed and executed from normal reach production. In addition, in this reach production, it is a reach state with "6" symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (B), countdown effect A is executed. In this countdown effect A, by moving the board movable body 15 to the unfolded position, the board movable body 15 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a and the predetermined area of the display screen 7b, and in the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b A countdown display image C1A is displayed in a display area which does not overlap the movable plate 15 as viewed from the user. The countdown display image C1A is an image representing a countdown starting from "10". A part of the countdown display image C1A is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (C), countdown effect B is executed. In this countdown effect B, the state where the board movable body 15 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b is continued, and does not overlap with the board movable body 15 as viewed from the player on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. A button pressing prompt image C1C is displayed in the display area, and further, a button image BTN is displayed. The button pressing prompting image C1C is displayed after the countdown of the countdown display image C1A becomes “1”, and is an image for prompting the player to press the effect button 63. The button image BTN represents the effect button 63. In other words, the button image BTN is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (D), a jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification effect, it rotates when it comes from the state where the board movable body 15 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. In the jackpot notification effect, a jackpot notification image C1B is displayed in a display area that does not overlap with the board movable body 15 when viewed from the player on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. The jackpot notification image C1B is an image indicating a jackpot to the player, and is indicated as "jackpot".

[Count effect D]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the count effect D.
This count effect D is performed during the change effect of the decorative symbol, and, first, as shown in FIG. 89 (A), reach effect is executed. This reach effect is an effect performed during the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R have the same symbol. In this reach effect, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, in the reach effect, the friend character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b. Reach production includes normal reach production with relatively low jackpot expectation and super reach production with relatively high jackpot expectation. Super reach production is a production that may be developed and executed from normal reach production. In addition, in this reach production, it is a reach state with "6" symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (B), countdown effect A is executed. In this countdown effect A, by moving the board movable body 15 to the unfolded position, the board movable body 15 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, and the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b are viewed from the player. The countdown display image C1A is displayed in the display area not overlapping the movable table 15. The countdown display image C1A is an image representing a countdown starting from "10". A part of the countdown display image C1A is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (C), countdown effect B is executed. In this countdown effect B, the state where the board movable body 15 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b is continued, and does not overlap with the board movable body 15 as viewed from the player on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. A button pressing prompt image C1C is displayed in the display area, and further, a button image BTN is displayed. The button pressing prompting image C1C is displayed after the countdown of the countdown display image C1A becomes “1”, and is an image for prompting the player to press the effect button 63. The button image BTN represents the effect button 63. In other words, the button image BTN is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (D), a jackpot notification effect is executed. In this big hit notification effect, while the state where the board movable body 15 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b is continued, the board movable body 15 emits light in a predetermined color (for example, rainbow color) Inform the player. In the jackpot notification effect, a jackpot notification image C1B is displayed in a display area that does not overlap with the board movable body 15 when viewed from the player on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. The jackpot notification image C1B is an image indicating a jackpot to the player, and is indicated as "jackpot".

[Count effect E]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the count effect E.
The count effect E uses only the display screen 7a without using the display screen 7b.
The count effect E is performed during the change effect of the decorative symbol. First, as shown in FIG. 90 (A), reach effect is performed. This reach effect is an effect performed during the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R have the same symbol. In this reach effect, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed. Reach production includes normal reach production with relatively low jackpot expectation and super reach production with relatively high jackpot expectation. Super reach production is a production that may be developed and executed from normal reach production. In addition, in this reach production, it is a reach state with "6" symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (B), countdown effect A is executed. In this countdown effect A, when the movable board 15 moves to the unfolding position, the movable board 15 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, and does not overlap with the movable board 15 when viewed from the player on the display screen 7a. A countdown display image C1A is displayed in the display area. The countdown display image C1A is an image representing a countdown starting from "10".

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (C), countdown effect B is executed. In this countdown effect B, the state where the board movable body 15 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a is continued, and in the display screen 7a, the countdown display image C1A is displayed in a display area not overlapping the board movable body 15 as viewed from the player. The display is continued. In FIG. 90 (C), it is shown that the countdown is progressing to “1” in the countdown display image C1A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (D), a jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification effect, the state in which the board movable body 15 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a is continued, and in the display screen 7a, the jackpot informing image C1B is in the display area not overlapping the board movable body 15 as viewed from the player. Is displayed. The jackpot notification image C1B is an image indicating a jackpot to the player, and is indicated as "jackpot".

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of count production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86 to 90, the movable board 15 is moved from the home position to the unfolded position to move the movable board in front of the predetermined areas of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. At this time, on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, the countdown display image is displayed in a display area which does not overlap with the movable plate 15 as viewed from the player. According to this configuration, it is possible to simultaneously enjoy the effects of the board movable body 15 and the countdown effects, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86 to FIG. 90, effects of the board movable body 15 are performed, and the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b do not overlap the board movable body 15 when viewed from the player. When the countdown display image is displayed in the display area and the countdown display reaches a predetermined value, a jackpot notification effect is performed. According to this configuration, the jackpot notification effect can be emphasized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 88 to 89, when the button image BTN is displayed in the countdown effect and the player operates the effect button 63, the board movable in the big hit notification effect The aspect of the body 15 is configured to be rotated or changed in color. According to this configuration, since the aspect of the board movable body 15 changes, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 89, when the button image BTN is displayed in the countdown effect and the player operates the effect button 63, in the jackpot notification effect, the board movable body 15 is It is configured to change the color. According to this configuration, since the color of the movable board 15 changes, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86 to FIG. 89, the movable panel 15 is moved from the home position to the unfolded position, and a predetermined area is formed on both the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. An effect is provided to stop the movable plate 15 at the front. According to this configuration, it is possible to enjoy the effects of the board movable body 15 disposed in front of the two display devices, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of count production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, five patterns of count effects A to E are implemented as the count effects, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of patterns of A to E A combined effect may be implemented.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are adjacent to each other in the count effects A to D, but the present invention is limited to this. Absent. For example, the first image display device 7A and / or the second image display device 7B may be moved to perform the on-hold display decorative symbol effects A to E. Also, the count effects A to D may be performed in a state where the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are separated by a predetermined distance.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when performing the count effects A to D, the first image display device 7A may be a main display device, and the second image display device 7B may be a sub display device. The display device 7A may be a sub display device, and the second image display device 7B may be a main display device. In this case, the main display device can be defined as a display device having a longer time for changing the decorative symbol than the sub display device.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when performing the count effects A to E, the countdown effect is shifted to the big hit notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the countdown effect, a transition may be made to a loss notification effect for notifying a disconnection.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the count effects A to D, the movable board 15 is moved to the unfolded position, whereby the movable board 15 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. In the display screen 7b, the countdown display image C1A is displayed in a display area which does not overlap with the board movable body 15 when viewed from the player, and the display area which does not overlap with the board movable body 15 when viewed from the player is Although two each are formed and the two display areas are formed by the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, respectively, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, one display area may be formed, or three or more display areas may be formed that do not overlap with the board movable body 15 when viewed from the player. Alternatively, the display area formed as such may be formed by the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, or may be formed by either the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b.

[Modification 6]
FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a modification of the count effect. In the count effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the countdown effect is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 91, count-up effect may be performed by count effect. In this case, in the count-up effect, when the counter value becomes a predetermined value, the process may shift to a jackpot notification effect.

[Modification 7]
FIG. 92 is a view showing a modification of the count effect. In the count effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the countdown reaches 1 or when the PUSH display is performed, transition is made to the jackpot notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, as shown in FIG. 92, even if the countdown is in the middle, transition to a jackpot notification effect may be made.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect C1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects, movable features, and an operation unit operable by a player,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a feature effect for moving the movable role from the first position to the second position to perform the effect of the movable role in front of the first region of the display means. ,
The second display effect is a timer display effect for executing timer display in a second area adjacent to the first area of the display means,
There may be a combined effect including the first display effect and the second display effect.
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect C1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1, which is
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is an operation display effect for displaying an operation unit image representing the operation unit in the second area of the display means,
The combination effect is an effect that may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, when the timer value of the timer display in the second display effect becomes a predetermined value, the third display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect C1-3]
The gaming machine according to the second aspect,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect of changing the mode of the movable part from the first mode to the second mode,
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, when the player operates the operation unit after the third display effect, the fourth display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect C1-4]
The gaming machine according to the third aspect,
The fourth display effect is an effect of changing the color of the movable role from the first color to the second color.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect C1-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4, wherein
The display means comprises a first display means and a second display means different from the first display means.
The first area of the display means is formed by the first display means and the second display means.
A game machine characterized by

  The following describes the role-related interlocking display effects A to C with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95. This feature linked display effect may be performed during the change effect of the decorative symbol or during the reach effect (super reach effect). That is, when the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and the instruction for performing the linked effect display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed. This is a display effect to be displayed on the screens 7a and 7b.

[Affiliate display indication production A]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the role-linked display effect A. In the role interlocking display effect A, first, the left side role interlocking display effect of FIG. 93 (A) is executed. In the left-hand-side product interlocking display effect, the first image display device 7A is positioned on the upper side, and the second image display device 7B is positioned on the lower side. The board movable character 15 (upper movable character) is stationary at the advanced position (deployed position), and in front of a part of the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A, the panel movable character 15 (left movable character Object and right movable character) are located.

  In this state, a light emission effect is performed in which one left side (left side movable part) of the board movable part 15 (upper movable part) emits light. A specific image S1 representing a specific target is displayed using the display screens 7a and 7b of both the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B in accordance with the light emission effect of the left movable role product. Specifically, the upper image IM11 displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the lower image IM21 displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B are visually connected. As a whole, a luminous image S1 representing a light streak is displayed. That is, the light emission image S1 is displayed across the display screens 7a and 7b. The light emission image S1 is displayed as if light emission is from the left movable part.

  Next, the right-side combination linked display effect shown in FIG. 93 (B) is executed. Specifically, a light emission effect is performed in which one of the right sides (right side movable roles) of the movable board 15 (upper movable roles) emits light. A specific image S2 representing a specific object is displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A in accordance with the light emission effect of the right movable combination. Specifically, the upper image IM12 displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A constitutes a light emission image S2 representing a line of light. The light emission image S2 is not displayed on the display screen 7b. The light emission image S2 is displayed as if light emission is from the right movable part. The right movable part performs a light emission effect in a state in which a part of the first image display device 7A is covered.

[Government linked display effect B]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the role-linked display effect B. As shown in FIG. The relative position relation between the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B and the display content of the display effect are different in the special effect interlocking display effect B compared to the special effect interlocking display effect A of FIG. 93. . In the left-hand-side product interlocking display effect of FIG. 94 (A), the panel movable character 15 (upper movable character) is stationary at the advanced position (deployment position) as in the role-related interlocking display effect A of FIG. . The first image display device 7A is located on the left side, and the second image display device 7B is located on the right side. The board movable character 15 (upper movable character) is stationary at the advanced position (deployed position), and in front of a part of the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A, the panel movable character 15 (left movable character Object and right movable character) are located.

  In this state, a light emission effect is performed in which one left side (left side movable part) of the board movable part 15 (upper movable part) emits light. A specific image S1 representing a specific target is displayed using the display screens 7a and 7b of both the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B in accordance with the light emission effect of the left movable role product. Specifically, the upper image IM11 displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the lower image IM21 displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B are visually connected. As a whole, a luminous image S1 representing a light streak is displayed. That is, the light emission image S1 is displayed across the display screens 7a and 7b. The light emission image S1 is displayed as if light emission is from the left movable part.

  Next, the right-side combination linked display effect shown in FIG. 94 (B) is executed. Specifically, a light emission effect is performed in which one of the right sides (right side movable roles) of the movable board 15 (upper movable roles) emits light. A specific image S2 representing a specific object is displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B in accordance with the light emission effect of the right movable combination. Specifically, the upper image IM22 displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B constitutes a light emission image S2 representing a line of light. The light emission image S2 is not displayed on the display screen 7a. The light emission image S2 is displayed as if light emission is from the right movable part. The right movable part performs a light emission effect in a state in which a part of the first image display device 7A is covered.

[Affiliate display indicator production C]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for describing the role-linked display effect C. As compared with the character interlocking display effect A in FIG. 93, the character interlocking display effect C in the role interlocking display effect C is different in the effect contents of the movable object 15 of the board and the display content of the display effect. In the left-hand-side product interlocking display effect of FIG. 95 (A), the board movable character 15 (upper movable function) is stationary at the advanced position (deployment position) as in the role-related interlocking display effect A of FIG. . Further, the first image display device 7A is located on the upper side, and the second image display device 7B is located on the lower side. The board movable character 15 (upper movable character) is stationary at the advanced position (deployed position), and in front of a part of the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A, the panel movable character 15 (left movable character Object and right movable character) are located.

  In this state, a moving effect is performed in which one left side (left side movable part) of the board movable part 15 (upper movable part) moves up and down. The specific image S1 representing the specific object is displayed using the display screens 7a and 7b of both the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B in accordance with the vertical movement effect of the left movable role. Specifically, the upper image IM11 displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the lower image IM21 displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B are visually connected. Displayed as a whole, and a specific image S1 representing a star-shaped figure as a whole is constructed. That is, the specific image (star-shaped graphic image) S1 is displayed across the display screens 7a and 7b. The specific image S1 may move up and down the display screens 7a and 7b.

  Next, the right-side combination linked display effect shown in FIG. 95 (B) is executed. Specifically, a moving effect is performed in which one of the right sides (right side movable roles) of the movable board 15 (upper movable roles) moves to the left and right. A specific image S2 representing a specific object is displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A in accordance with the left / right movement effect of the right movable combination. Specifically, the upper image IM12 displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A constitutes a specific image S2 representing a character. The specific image S2 is not displayed on the display screen 7a. The specific image S2 may move left and right on the display screens 7a and 7b. The right movable role performs movement effects in a state in which a part of the first image display device 7A is covered.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of role-related interlocking display production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the first image display device 7A and the second image are displayed when the left movable role of the movable board 15 is performing a light emission effect. When the specific image S1 (for example, the light emission image) is displayed on both of the display devices 7B and the right movable role object of the board movable role object 15 is performing the light emission effect, (For example, a light emission image) is displayed, and the specific image S2 is not displayed on the second image display device 7B. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect example 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93 to FIG. 95, when the board movable character 15 (right movable character) is executing a specific effect (emission effect, movement effect, etc.), It covers a part of the first image display device 7A. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect example 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93 to FIG. 95, when the board movable character 15 (left movable character) is executing a specific effect (emission effect, movement effect, etc.), It covers a part of the first image display device 7A. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect example 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93 and 94, the specific effect of the board movable character 15 (left movable character) is a light emission effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect example 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93 and 94, the specific effect of the board movable character 15 (right movable character) is a light emission effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect example 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the left movable role and the right movable role of the movable board 15 are movable. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of role-related interlocking display production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left movable role and the right movable role of the movable board 15 are configured to be movable. However, at least one of the left movable part and the right movable part of the board movable part 15 may not be movable.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the specific images S1 and S2 are light emission images and character images. However, the specific objects represented by the specific images S1 and S2 mean all things that can be recognized as one independent object, and in addition to images such as characters and objects, abstract figures and characters , Symbols, smoke, rays, afterimage, etc. are also included.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
態 様 [Aspect C2-1]
First display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A second display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A first feature capable of executing a first effect;
It is a gaming machine provided with a second character capable of executing a second effect,
When the first accessory is executing the first effect, a first image is displayed on both the first display means and the second display means,
When the second character is executing the second effect, a second image is displayed on the first display means, and the second image is displayed on the second display means Not,
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect C2-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The second accessory covers a part of the first display means when executing the second effect.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect C2-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein
The first accessory covers a part of the first display means when executing the first effect.
A game machine characterized by

態 様 [Aspect C2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
The first effect is a light-emitting effect that the first character emits light,
A game machine characterized by

態 様 [Aspect C2-5]
It is a game machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The second effect is a light-emitting effect that the second character emits light,
A game machine characterized by

態 様 [Aspect C2-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The first display means and the second display means are each configured to be movable.
A game machine characterized by

  The image movement pending change effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. This image movement pending change presentation may be performed during variation presentation of a decorative symbol, during reach presentation (super reach presentation), or the like. That is, when the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the change effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and the instruction for executing the image movement hold change effect is included, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed. This is a display effect to be displayed on the screens 7a and 7b.

[Image movement pending change effect A]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the image movement hold change effect A. In the image movement pending change effect A, first, the image appearance effect of FIG. 96 (A) is executed. In the image appearance effect, the first image display device 7A is located on the upper side, the second image display device 7B is located on the lower side, and the retention images 9A and 9B and the retention digest image 9C are displayed below the second image display device 7B. There is. In this state, the image IM1 appears from the upper right of the display screen 7a. The image IM1 is an image corresponding to a part of a specific object (here, a star-shaped figure). That is, the image IM1 is displayed in a shape in which the upper right side of the star-shaped figure is framed out, and gradually moves to the lower left. Specific objects mean all things that can be recognized as one independent object, and in addition to images of characters and objects, abstract figures, characters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimage, etc. included.

  Next, the image movement effect shown in FIG. 96 (B) is executed. Specifically, the image IM1 appearing from the upper right of the display screen 7a moves in the lower left direction, and the entire image is displayed to become a star-shaped figure (star-shaped image), and contacts the lower end of the display screen 7a. Then, the image stride effect shown in FIG. 96 (C) is executed. Specifically, at the lower end of the display screen 7a, the image IM1 has a shape in which the lower side of the specific object (star-shaped figure) is framed out. On the other hand, on the display screen 7b, an image IM2 of a shape corresponding to the part out of frame is displayed, and an image (here, a star-shaped image) representing a specific object is formed by the images IM1 and IM2. A star-shaped image formed by the image IM1 and the image IM2 is displayed straddling the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, and moves in the lower left direction as a whole.

  Next, the on-hold change effect shown in FIG. 96 (D) is executed. Specifically, after a star-shaped image is displayed straddling display screen 7a and display screen 7b, an embodiment in which one of four reserved images 9A (held image IM3) corresponds to this star-shaped image Change to That is, at least one of the shape, color, movement, etc. of the reserve image IM3 changes to one corresponding to the shape, color, movement, etc. of the star-shaped image. Here, the shape of the retention image IM3 changes to a star shape.

[Image movement pending change effect B]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the image movement hold change effect B. The image movement suspension change effect B differs from the image movement suspension change effect A of FIG. 96 in the relative positional relationship between the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B. In the image appearance effect in FIG. 97A, the first image display 7A is on the right side, the second image display 7B is on the left, and the reserve image 9A and the reserve digest image 9C are below the second image display 7B. It is displayed. In this state, the image IM1 appears from the upper right of the display screen 7a. The image IM1 is an image corresponding to a part of a specific object (here, a star-shaped figure). That is, the image IM1 is displayed in a shape in which the upper right side of the star-shaped figure is framed out, and gradually moves to the lower left. Specific objects mean all things that can be recognized as one independent object, and in addition to images of characters and objects, abstract figures, characters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimage, etc. included.

  Next, the image movement effect shown in FIG. 97 (B) is executed. Specifically, the image IM1 appearing from the upper right of the display screen 7a moves in the lower left direction, and the entire image is displayed to become a star-shaped figure, and contacts the left end of the display screen 7a. Then, the image stride effect shown in FIG. 97 (C) is executed. Specifically, at the right end of the display screen 7a, the image IM1 has a shape in which the left side of the specific object (star-shaped figure) is framed out. On the other hand, on the display screen 7b, an image IM2 of a shape corresponding to the part out of frame is displayed, and an image (here, a star-shaped image) representing a specific object is formed by the images IM1 and IM2. A star-shaped image formed by the image IM1 and the image IM2 is displayed straddling the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, and moves in the lower left direction as a whole.

  Next, the on-hold change effect shown in FIG. 97 (D) is executed. Specifically, after a star-shaped image is displayed straddling display screen 7a and display screen 7b, an embodiment in which one of four reserved images 9A (held image IM3) corresponds to this star-shaped image Change to That is, at least one of the shape, color, movement, etc. of the reserve image IM3 changes to one corresponding to the shape, color, movement, etc. of the star-shaped image. Here, the shape of the retention image IM3 changes to a star shape.

[Image movement hold change effect C]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the image movement hold change effect C. The image movement suspension change effect C, as compared with the image movement suspension change effect A in FIG. 96, is a point at which the decorative symbol is displayed on the first image display device 7A, and a movable combination in front of the first image display device 7A. Differs in that the Here, it is assumed that the movable table 15 (upper movable object) is stationary at the advanced position (deployed position). In the image appearance effect of FIG. 98 (A), the first image display device 7A is positioned on the upper side, the second image display device 7B is positioned on the lower side, and a portion of the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A is The movable part 15 is located. Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed below the first image display device 7A, and reserve images 9A, 9B, and a reserve digest image 9C are displayed below the second image display device 7B. In this state, the image IM1 appears from the upper right of the display screen 7a. The image IM1 is an image corresponding to a part of a specific object (here, a star-shaped figure). That is, the image IM1 is displayed in a shape in which the upper right side of the star-shaped figure is framed out, and gradually moves to the lower left. Specific objects mean all things that can be recognized as one independent object, and in addition to images of characters and objects, abstract figures, characters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimage, etc. included. Part of the image IM <b> 1 is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the board movable character 15.

  Next, the image stride effect shown in FIG. 98 (B) is executed. Specifically, the image IM1 appearing from the upper right of the display screen 7a moves in the lower left direction and contacts the left end of the display screen 7a. Then, at the lower end of the display screen 7a, the image IM1 has a shape in which the lower side of the specific object (star-shaped figure) is framed out. On the other hand, on the display screen 7b, an image IM2 of a shape corresponding to the part out of frame is displayed, and an image (here, a star-shaped image) representing a specific object is formed by the images IM1 and IM2. At this time, the star-shaped image is also out at the upper end and the right end of the display screen 7a. Further, the movable board 15 is located in front of a part of the star-shaped image, and a part of the star-shaped image is in a state in which it is difficult for the movable board 15 to visually recognize. A star-shaped image formed by the image IM1 and the image IM2 is displayed straddling the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, and as shown in FIG. 98 (C), moves further in the lower left direction as a whole.

  Next, the on-hold change effect shown in FIG. 98 (D) is executed. Specifically, after a star-shaped image is displayed straddling display screen 7a and display screen 7b, one of holding images 9A (pending image IM3) is changed to a mode corresponding to this star-shaped image Do. That is, at least one of the shape, color, movement, etc. of the reserve image IM3 changes to one corresponding to the shape, color, movement, etc. of the star-shaped image. Here, one shape of the retention image IM3 changes to a star shape.

[Image movement pending change effect D]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the image movement holding change effect D. As compared with the image movement pending change presentation A in FIG. 96, the image movement pending change presentation D is a point at which the size of a specific object (here, a star-shaped figure) represented by the image IM1 or the image IM2 changes. Is different. Specific objects mean all things that can be recognized as one independent object, and in addition to images of characters and objects, abstract figures, characters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimage, etc. included.

  In the image appearance effect of FIG. 99 (A), the first image display device 7A is located on the upper side, and the second image display device 7B is located on the lower side. The hold images 9A and 9B and the hold digestion image 9C are displayed below the second image display device 7B. In this state, the image IM1 appears from the upper right of the display screen 7a. The image IM1 is an image corresponding to a part of a specific object (here, a star-shaped figure). That is, the image IM1 is displayed in a shape in which the upper right side of the star-shaped figure is framed out, and gradually moves to the lower left.

  Next, the image stride effect shown in FIG. 99 (B) is executed. Specifically, the image IM1 (star-shaped figure) appearing from the upper right of the display screen 7a becomes larger while moving in the lower left direction, and contacts the left end of the display screen 7a. Then, at the lower end of the display screen 7a, the image IM1 has a shape in which the lower side of the star-shaped figure is framed out. On the other hand, on the display screen 7b, an image IM2 of a shape corresponding to the part out of frame is displayed, and an image (here, a star-shaped image) representing a specific object is formed by the images IM1 and IM2. At this time, the star-shaped image is also out at the upper end and the right end of the display screen 7a. The star-shaped image formed by the image IM1 and the image IM2 is displayed straddling the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, and moves in the lower left direction while becoming larger as shown in FIG. 99 (C). .

  Next, the on-hold change effect shown in FIG. 99 (D) is executed. Specifically, after a star-shaped image is displayed straddling display screen 7a and display screen 7b, one of holding images 9A (pending image IM3) is changed to a mode corresponding to this star-shaped image Do. That is, at least one of the shape, color, movement, etc. of the reserve image IM3 changes to one corresponding to the shape, color, movement, etc. of the star-shaped image. Here, the shape of the retention image IM3 changes to a star shape.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of image movement pending change production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 99, in the first effect and the first effect, a star-shaped graphic image (specific image) is displayed on the first image display device 7A. After that, after the second effect in which the star-shaped graphic image is displayed across both the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B and the second effect, the second image display device 7B is performed. It is configured to be able to execute a third effect in which the held image IM3 to be displayed changes. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 99, in the first effect, a specific image corresponding to a part of a specific target (here, a star-shaped graphic) is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 99, in the third effect, the reserved image IM3 changes to a shape corresponding to a specific image (here, a star-shaped image). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99, the specific image (here, a star-shaped image) displayed in the second effect is larger in size than the specific image displayed in the first effect. Is large. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98, in the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the first image display device 7A. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98, in the second effect, the board movable character 15 located in front of at least a part of the specific image (here, a star-shaped image) is provided. . According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of image movement pending change production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of pending images changing to the aspect corresponding to the specific image is one, but the number of pending images changing to the corresponding aspect may be plural. Further, the reserved image changing to the corresponding mode may change other than the shape. For example, the color may be changed to the same color as the specific image, or the same operation as the specific image may be performed.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the specific image is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, the hold image changes to a mode corresponding to the specific image. However, before the specific image straddles the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, the reserved image may change to a mode corresponding to the specific image, or may change simultaneously with the specific image.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the movable board 15 is located in front of a part of the star-shaped image, and a part of the star-shaped image becomes difficult to be recognized by the movable board 15. There is. However, the movable board 15 may be located in front of the entire star-shaped image, and all of the star-shaped images may be difficult to be recognized by the movable board 15.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B1-1]
First display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A second display unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
After the first effect in which a specific image is displayed on the first display means and the first effect, the specific image straddles both the first display means and the second display means It is possible to execute a second effect to be displayed and a third effect in which the hold icon displayed on the second display means changes after the second effect.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine described in B1-1,
The specific image is an image representing a specific object,
In the first effect, an image corresponding to a part of the specific object is displayed.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to B1-1 or B1-2,
In the third effect, the hold icon changes to a shape corresponding to the specific image.
A game machine characterized by

態 様 [Aspect B 1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of B1-1 to B1-3,
The specific image displayed in the second effect is larger in size than the specific image displayed in the first effect.
A game machine characterized by

態 様 [Aspect B1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of B1-1 to B1-4,
In the first effect, a decorative symbol is displayed on the first display means.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect B1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of B1-1 to B1-5 further includes
It has an accessory located in front of at least a part of the specific image displayed in the second effect.
A game machine characterized by

  The operation corresponding to operation display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. This operation corresponding operation display production can be performed during variation production of a decoration pattern, during reach production (super reach production), or the like. That is, when the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the fluctuation representation start command received from the sub control board 90 and the instruction for performing the operation corresponding to the operation display is included, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed. This is a display effect to be displayed on the screens 7a and 7b.

[Operation-response operation display effect A]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for describing an operation corresponding operation display effect A. In the operation corresponding operation display effect A, first, the vertical vibration effect of FIG. 100 (A) is executed. In the vertical vibration rendition, the first image display device 7A is located on the upper side, and the second image display device 7B is located on the lower side. The first image display 7A displays a specific image IM1 representing a specific target (here, a star-shaped figure) and a meter image IM2 representing a meter in which a plurality of rectangular figures are arranged. On the second image display device 7B, an operation unit image (button image) BN indicating the appearance of the effect button 63 and an operation method suggestion image RD suggesting an operation method of the effect button 63 are displayed. Here, the operation method suggestion image RD is configured as a character image of “double hit !!!”. The operation method suggestion image RD may be any character, figure, symbol or the like as long as the image suggests the operation method of the operation means (here, the effect button 63).

  In this state, the specific image IM1 of the display screen 7a moves in the direction corresponding to the operation direction of the effect button 63. Specifically, the specific image IM1 vibrates in the vertical direction. The vertical direction corresponds to the operation direction of the effect button 63. In response to the player's operation of the effect button 63, the meter image IM2 changes. Here, in accordance with the amount of operation of the effect button 63 by the player, the color of the rectangular graphic forming the meter changes in order from the lower rectangular graphic. The button image BN changes color in response to the player's operation of the effect button 63.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (B), the specific image IM1 moves slowly upward. The upward movement corresponds to the operation direction (vertical direction) of the effect button 63. That is, the specific image IM1 on the display screen 7a continues to move in the direction corresponding to the operation direction of the effect button 63. In accordance with the increase in the amount of operation of the effect button 63 by the player, the color of the rectangular graphic forming the meter image IM2 further changes in order from the lower rectangular graphic. The button image BN changes color in response to the player's operation of the effect button 63. The display of the operation method suggestion image RD is continued.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (C), the specific image IM1 moves slowly downward. The downward movement corresponds to the operation direction (vertical direction) of the effect button 63. That is, the specific image IM1 of the display screen 7a further continues the movement in the direction corresponding to the operation direction of the effect button 63. In accordance with the increase in the amount of operation of the effect button 63 by the player, the color of the rectangular graphic forming the meter image IM2 further changes in order from the lower rectangular graphic. The button image BN changes color in response to the player's operation of the effect button 63.

  Next, the meter MAX effect shown in FIG. 100 (D) is executed. Specifically, when all the colors of the plurality of rectangular figures constituting the meter image IM2 change, the button image BN changes to an exploded mode. The specific image IM1 on the display screen 7a moves up and down.

[Operation-response operation display effect B]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for describing an operation corresponding operation display effect B. As compared with the operation corresponding operation display effect A in FIG. 100, the operation corresponding operation display effect B in the operation corresponds to the type of the operation unit represented by the operation unit image BN and the movement mode of the specific image IM1. In the left and right swing production in FIG. 101A, the first image display device 7A is located on the upper side, and the second image display device 7B is located on the lower side. The first image display 7A displays a specific image IM1 representing a specific target (here, a star-shaped figure) and a meter image IM2 representing a meter in which a plurality of rectangular figures are arranged. On the second image display device 7B, a handle handle image HD (operation unit image) representing the appearance of the handle 60 and an operation method suggestion image RD suggesting a method of operating the handle 60 are displayed. Here, the operation method suggestion image RD is configured as a character image of “Turn on the handle!”. The operation method suggestion image RD may be any character, figure, or symbol as long as the image suggests the operation method of the operation means (here, the handle 60).

  In this state, the specific image IM1 of the display screen 7a moves in the direction corresponding to the operation direction of the handle 60. Specifically, the specific image IM1 reciprocates in the semicircular circumferential direction. The semi-circumferential direction corresponds to the operation direction of the handle 60. The meter image IM2 changes according to the operation of the handle 60 by the player. Here, in accordance with the amount of operation of the handle 60 by the player, the colors of the rectangular figures constituting the meter sequentially change from the lower rectangular figure. The handle image HD changes in color in accordance with the operation of the handle 60 by the player.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 101 (B) and 101 (C), the specific image IM1 rotates in the left-right direction while moving in the semi-circumferential direction. The rotation in the left-right direction also corresponds to the operation direction of the handle 60. Thus, the specific image IM1 of the display screen 7a performs a plurality of operations corresponding to the operation direction of the handle 60. In accordance with the increase in the amount of operation of the handle 60 by the player, the color of the rectangular graphic forming the meter image IM2 further changes sequentially from the lower rectangular graphic. The handle image HD changes in color in accordance with the operation of the handle 60 by the player. The display of the operation method suggestion image RD is continued.

  Next, the meter MAX effect shown in FIG. 101 (D) is executed. Specifically, when all the colors of the plurality of rectangular figures constituting the meter image IM2 change, the handle image HD changes to an exploded mode. The specific image IM1 on the display screen 7a is moved in a semi-circumferential direction.

[Operation Corresponding to Operation Display Effect C]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for describing an operation corresponding operation display effect C. As compared with the operation corresponding operation display effect A in FIG. 100, the operation corresponding operation display effect C in operation differs in the type of the operation unit represented by the operation unit image BN and the movement mode of the specific image IM1. Here, it is assumed that the gaming machine 1 is provided with a lever operable by the player. This lever may be installed at any place of the gaming machine 1. Further, this lever is electrically connected to the sub control board 90, and the sub control board 90 can detect the operation of the lever by the player.

  In the lateral rocking effect in FIG. 102 (A), the first image display 7A is located on the upper side, and the second image display 7B is located on the lower side. The first image display device 7A displays a specific image IM1 representing a specific target (here, a sword) and a meter image IM2 representing a meter in which a plurality of rectangular figures are arranged. On the second image display device 7B, a lever image LV (operation unit image) representing the appearance of the lever and an operation method suggestion image RD suggesting the operation method of the lever are displayed. Here, the operation method suggestion image RD is configured as a character image of “Take a lever !!!”. The operation method suggestion image RD may be any character, figure, symbol or the like as long as the image suggests the operation method of the operation means (here, the lever).

  In this state, the specific image IM1 of the display screen 7a moves in the direction corresponding to the operation direction of the lever. Specifically, the specific image IM1 swings to the left and right. The left and right swing corresponds to the operation direction of the lever. The meter image IM2 changes in response to the operation of the lever by the player. Here, the color of the rectangular graphic forming the meter changes in order from the lower rectangular graphic in accordance with the amount of lever operation by the player. The lever image LV changes color in accordance with the operation of the lever by the player.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (B) and FIG. 102 (C), the specific image IM1 slowly swings to the left and right. As shown in FIG. 102B, tilting of the specific image IM1 in the left direction corresponds to the operation direction of the lever. Further, as shown in FIG. 102C, tilting of the specific image IM1 in the right direction also corresponds to the operation direction of the lever. Thus, the specific image IM1 on the display screen 7a performs a plurality of operations corresponding to the operation direction of the lever. The color of the rectangular graphic forming the meter image IM2 further changes in order from the lower rectangular graphic in accordance with the increase in the amount of lever operation by the player. The shape of the lever image LV changes so as to alternately represent a state in which the lever is pulled and a state in which the lever is returned. The display of the operation method suggestion image RD is continued.

  Next, the meter MAX effect shown in FIG. 102 (D) is executed. Specifically, when all the colors of the plurality of rectangular figures constituting the meter image IM2 change, the lever image LV changes to an exploded mode. On the display screen 7a, a suggestion image IM3 indicating the state of the meter is displayed. Here, it is configured as a character image of "MAX !!!".

[Operation-response operation display effect D]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for describing the operation corresponding operation display effect D. As compared with the operation corresponding action display effect A of FIG. 100, the operation corresponding action display effect D for the operation corresponds to a point where the movable combination is located in front of the first image display device 7A and a character image on a part of the operation unit image. The overlapping points are different. Here, it is assumed that the movable table 15 (upper movable object) is stationary at the advanced position (deployed position).

  In the vertical vibration rendition shown in FIG. 103 (A), the first image display 7A is on the upper side and the second image display 7B is on the lower side, and in front of a part of the display screen 7a of the first image display 7A. The movable part 15 is located. The first image display 7A displays a specific image IM1 representing a specific target (here, a star-shaped figure) and a meter image IM2 representing a meter in which a plurality of rectangular figures are arranged. Part of the meter image IM2 is in a state in which visual recognition is difficult by the board movable character 15. On the second image display device 7B, an operation unit image (button image) BN showing the appearance of the effect button 63, a character image CA displayed so as to cover a part of the button image BN, and an operation method of the effect button 63. The operation method suggestion image RD which suggests the is displayed. Here, the operation method suggestion image RD is configured as a character image of “double hit !!!”. The operation method suggestion image RD may be any character, figure, symbol or the like as long as the image suggests the operation method of the operation means (here, the effect button 63).

  In this state, the specific image IM1 of the display screen 7a moves in the direction corresponding to the operation direction of the effect button 63. Specifically, the specific image IM1 vibrates in the vertical direction. The vertical direction corresponds to the operation direction of the effect button 63. In response to the player's operation of the effect button 63, the meter image IM2 changes. Here, in accordance with the amount of operation of the effect button 63 by the player, the color of the rectangular graphic forming the meter changes in order from the lower rectangular graphic. The button image BN changes color in response to the player's operation of the effect button 63.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 103 (B) and 103 (C), the new road in the vertical direction of the specific image IM1 continues. In accordance with the increase in the amount of operation of the effect button 63 by the player, the color of the rectangular graphic forming the meter image IM2 further changes in order from the lower rectangular graphic. The button image BN changes color in response to the player's operation of the effect button 63. The display of the operation method suggestion image RD is continued.

  Next, the meter MAX effect shown in FIG. 103 (D) is executed. Specifically, when all the colors of the plurality of rectangular figures constituting the meter image IM2 change, the button image BN changes to an exploded mode. The specific image IM1 on the display screen 7a moves up and down.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of operation corresponding operation display production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 to 103, an operation unit image (for example, a button image BN, a handle image HD, a lever image LV) is displayed on the second image display device 7B. In the state in which the specific image IM1 is displayed on the image display device 7A, an operation direction corresponding rendering is performed in which the specific image IM1 moves in the direction corresponding to the operation direction of the operation unit. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 and 103, the operation unit image represents the appearance of the effect button 63 button, and in the operation direction corresponding effect, the specific image IM1 is the button operation direction Move in the vertical direction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 to 103, the meter image IM2 is displayed on the first image display device 7A, and in the operation direction corresponding effect, the meter is operated according to the operation of the operation unit by the player. The image IM2 changes. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 to 103, in the operation direction corresponding rendering, the operation method suggestion image RD is displayed on the second image display device 7B. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, in the operation direction corresponding effect, the character image CA is displayed on the first image display device 7A. The character image CA is displayed so as to cover a part of the operation unit image. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, when the operation direction correspondence effect is being executed, the board movable role object 15 is positioned in front of at least a part of the first image display device 7A. There is. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
The modification of the operation corresponding operation display production is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the vertical direction is exemplified as the operation direction of the button image BN, but the horizontal direction and the oblique direction also correspond to the operation direction of the button. The movement corresponding to the operation direction of the operation unit by the specific image may not be repeated. That is, movement corresponding to the operation direction may be performed only once.

[Modification 2]
Although the meter image is displayed in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the meter image may not be displayed. In addition, the operation method suggestion image RD may not be displayed. In addition, the character image CA may not be displayed.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the meter image IM2 represents a meter in which a plurality of rectangular figures are arranged. However, the meter image IM2 may have any configuration as long as it can indicate the current situation in the predetermined range.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B2-1]
Operation means operable by the player;
First display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A second display unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
One of the images displayed on the first display means is a specific image,
One of the images displayed on the second display means is an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation means,
The operating means is operable in a specific operating direction,
An operation direction in which the specific image moves in a direction corresponding to the operation direction in a state in which the operation unit image is displayed on the second display means and the specific image is displayed on the first display means Perform the corresponding production,
A game machine characterized by

態 様 [Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
The operation means is a button,
In the operation direction corresponding effect, the specific image moves in the vertical direction.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect B2-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B2-1 or aspect B2-2,
One of the images displayed on the first display means is a meter image,
In the operation direction correspondence effect, the meter image changes in accordance with the operation of the operation means by the player.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect B2-4]
A game machine according to any one of modes B2-1 to B2-3, wherein
One of the images displayed on the second display means is an operation method suggestion image that suggests the operation method of the operation means,
In the operation direction corresponding effect, the operation method suggestion image is displayed on the second display means.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect B2-5]
A game machine according to any one of Aspects B2-1 to B2-4, wherein
One of the images displayed on the first display means is a character image,
In the operation direction correspondence effect, the character image is displayed so as to cover a part of the operation unit image.
A game machine characterized by

態 様 [Aspect B2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-5 further includes
It has an accessory located in front of at least a part of the first display means when the operation direction correspondence effect is being executed.
A game machine characterized by

  The image superimposed display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. The image superimposed display effect may be performed during the change effect of the decorative symbol or during the reach effect (super reach effect). That is, when the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and the instruction to execute the image superimposed display effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen is displayed. It is a display effect to be displayed on 7a and 7b.

[Image superimposed display effect A]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the image superimposed display effect A. In the image superimposed display effect A, first, the image appearance effect of FIG. 104 (A) is executed. In the image appearance effect, the first image display device 7A is located on the upper side, and the second image display device 7B is located on the lower side, which are respectively corresponding backgrounds. Here, both the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b are dark background images. In the second image display device 7B, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, reserve images 9A, 9B, and reserve digest image 9C are displayed. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the reserved images 9A, 9B, and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed dark together with the background image.

  In this state, on both the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, a plurality of images IM1 appear from the left and right sides of each display screen. The image IM1 has a shape representing a specific object (here, a circular figure). Specific objects mean all things that can be recognized as one independent object, and in addition to images of characters and objects, abstract figures, characters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimage, etc. included. The image IM1 appears from the left and right ends of the display screen in a shape in which a part of the circular figure is framed out, and moves toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen. In the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, parts (image areas) other than the part where the image IM1 is displayed are dark.

  Next, the image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 104 (B) is executed. Specifically, one or more images IM1 among the plurality of images IM1 (circular graphic images) displayed on the display screen 7b overlap with parts of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R during movement. That is, the one or more images IM1 are displayed as overlapping with a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is in a state of being difficult to view by the one or more images IM1. In addition, one or more images IM1 move from one display screen of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b to the other display screen. For example, one or more images IM1 displayed on the display screen 7a move toward the display screen 7b, and at least a part thereof is displayed on the display screen 7b. Thereafter, the entire image IM1 is displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, the background image change presentation shown in FIG. 104 (C) is executed. Specifically, on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, an effect of brightening a portion (image area) other than the portion where the image IM1 is displayed is performed. Also at this time, one or more images IM1 among the plurality of images IM1 (circular graphic images) displayed on the display screen 7b overlap with part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R during movement.

  Next, the bonus item appearance presentation shown in FIG. 104 (D) is executed. Specifically, the board movable character 15 (whole movable character) moves to the advanced position (deployed position) and stands still. As a result, the movable movable unit 15 advances to the front of both the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B.

[Image superimposed display effect B]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the image superimposed display effect B. The image superimposed display effect B is different from the image superimposed display effect A of FIG. 104 in the relative positional relationship between the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B and the movement mode of the image IM1. In the image appearance effect of FIG. 105 (A), the first image display device 7A is located on the right side, and the second image display device 7B is located on the left side, which respectively correspond to the background. Here, both the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b are dark background images. On the second image display device 7B, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, a reserve image 9A, and a reserve digest image 9C are displayed. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the reserved image 9A, and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed dark together with the background image.

  In this state, a plurality of images IM1 appear from the upper side of each display screen on both the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. The image IM1 has a shape representing a specific object (here, a circular figure). Specific objects mean all things that can be recognized as one independent object, and in addition to images of characters and objects, abstract figures, characters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimage, etc. included. The image IM1 appears from the upper end of the display screen in a form in which a part of the circular figure is framed out, and moves toward the lower side of the display screen. In the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, parts (image areas) other than the part where the image IM1 is displayed are dark.

  Next, the image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 105 (B) is executed. Specifically, one or more images IM1 among the plurality of images IM1 (circular graphic images) displayed on the display screen 7b overlap with parts of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R during movement. That is, the one or more images IM1 are displayed as overlapping with a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is in a state of being difficult to view by the one or more images IM1. In addition, one or more images IM1 move from one display screen of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b to the other display screen. For example, one or more images IM1 displayed on the display screen 7a move toward the display screen 7b, and at least a part thereof is displayed on the display screen 7b. Thereafter, the entire image IM1 is displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, the background image change presentation shown in FIG. 105 (C) is executed. Specifically, on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, an effect of brightening a portion (image area) other than the portion where the image IM1 is displayed is performed. Also at this time, one or more images IM1 among the plurality of images IM1 (circular graphic images) displayed on the display screen 7b overlap with part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R during movement.

  Next, the bonus item appearance presentation shown in FIG. 105 (D) is executed. Specifically, the board movable character 15 (whole movable character) moves to the advanced position (deployed position) and stands still. As a result, the movable movable unit 15 advances to the front of both the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B.

[Image superimposed display effect C]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the image superimposed display effect C. The image superimposed display effect C is different from the image superimposed display effect A in FIG. 104 in that the movable role is located in front of the image display device at the time of image appearance effect. Here, it is assumed that the movable table 15 (upper movable object) is stationary at the advanced position (deployed position). In the image appearance effect of FIG. 106 (A), the first image display device 7A is positioned on the upper side, and the second image display device 7B is positioned on the lower side, which correspond to the respective backgrounds. Here, both the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b are dark background images. In the second image display device 7B, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, reserve images 9A, 9B, and reserve digest image 9C are displayed. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the reserved image 9A, and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed dark together with the background image.

  In this state, on both the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, a plurality of images IM1 appear from the left and right sides of each display screen. The image IM1 has a shape representing a specific object (here, a circular figure). Specific objects mean all things that can be recognized as one independent object, and in addition to images of characters and objects, abstract figures, characters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimage, etc. included. The image IM1 appears from the left and right ends of the display screen in a form in which a part of the circular figure is framed out, and moves toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen. Part of the image IM <b> 1 is difficult to see in part because of the movable board 15 (upper movable part). In the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, parts (image areas) other than the part where the image IM1 is displayed are dark.

  Next, an image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 106 (B) is executed. Specifically, one or more images IM1 among the plurality of images IM1 (circular graphic images) displayed on the display screen 7b overlap with parts of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R during movement. That is, the one or more images IM1 are displayed as overlapping with a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is in a state of being difficult to view by the one or more images IM1. In addition, one or more images IM1 move from one display screen of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b to the other display screen. For example, one or more images IM1 displayed on the display screen 7a move toward the display screen 7b, and at least a part thereof is displayed on the display screen 7b. Thereafter, the entire image IM1 is displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, the background image change presentation shown in FIG. 106 (C) is executed. Specifically, on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, an effect of brightening a portion (image area) other than the portion where the image IM1 is displayed is performed. Also at this time, one or more images IM1 among the plurality of images IM1 (circular graphic images) displayed on the display screen 7b overlap with part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R during movement.

  Next, the bonus item appearance presentation shown in FIG. 106 (D) is executed. Specifically, the board movable character 15 (whole movable character) moves to the advanced position (deployed position) and stands still. As a result, the movable movable unit 15 advances to the front of both the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B. At this time, both the upper movable character and the whole movable character are in the advanced position (deployed position).

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of a picture superposition display production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, the first image display device 7A and the second image are displayed in a state in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the second image display device 7B. An image IM1 representing a specific target (here, a circular figure) is displayed on the display device 7B, and a first effect is produced in which the image IM1 overlaps a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, in the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, since the image IM1 overlaps a part of the decorative symbol whose variation has stopped, it is possible to visually entertain the player and to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, in the first effect, the background images of the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B change correspondingly. According to this configuration, since the background image changes correspondingly, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, in the first effect, the image IM1 displayed on the first image display device 7A moves and at least a part of the image IM1 is the second image. It is displayed on the display device 7B. According to this configuration, since one or more images IM1 are displayed straddling two display screens, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, it has a board movable character 15 (whole movable character) which can be advanced to the front of each of the first image display 7A and the second image display 7B. After the first effect, a second effect is performed in which the movable work object 15 advances to the front of both the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B. According to this configuration, since a part of the two display screens is simultaneously covered by one effect presentation, it is possible to visually entertain the player and to improve the interest.

[Modification]
The modification of an image superposition display production is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the background images of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b are changed in correspondence with the entire display screen. However, the background images of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b may be changed correspondingly to a part of the display screen.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the one or more images IM1 displayed on the second image display device 7B overlap with part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. However, a part of the one or more images IM1 displayed on the second image display device 7B may overlap the whole of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment, one or more images IM1 displayed on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b are moved from one display screen to the other display screen. However, all the images IM1 displayed on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b may move from one display screen to the other display screen. Further, the image IM1 displayed on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b may not move from one display screen to the other display screen.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B 3-1]
First display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A second display unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
One of the images displayed on the first display means is a specific image representing a specific object,
One of the images displayed on the second display means is the specific image,
One of the images displayed on the second display means is a decorative pattern,
In the state where the decorative symbol is displayed on the second display means, the specific image is displayed on the first display means and the second display means, and the specific image is at least a part of the decorative symbol. Perform overlapping first effects,
A game machine characterized by

態 様 [Aspect B3-2]
It is a gaming machine described in B3-1,
In the first effect, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect B3-3]
It is a gaming machine according to B3-1 or B3-2,
In the first effect, at least a portion of the background image of each of the first display means and the second display means changes correspondingly.
A game machine characterized by

態 様 [Aspect B3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of B3-1 to B3-3,
In the first effect, the specific image displayed on the first display means is moved and at least a part of the specific image is displayed on the second display means.
A game machine characterized by

態 様 [Aspect B3-5]
In the gaming machine according to any one of B3-1 to B3-4,
A movable part which can be advanced to the front of each of the first display means and the second display means;
After the first effect, a second effect is performed in which the movable combination is advanced to the front of both the first display means and the second display means.
A game machine characterized by

  The special prefetching effects A to E will be described below with reference to FIGS. 107 to 111. This special pre-reading effect is an effect concerning the fluctuation effect of the decoration pattern.

[Special pre-reading effect A]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for describing special pre-reading effect A. FIG.
First, in the special pre-reading effect A, as shown in FIG. 107 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in variation are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the friend character CRA, the first holding icon 9A, and the second holding icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. In FIGS. 107 (B) to 107 (D) below, display effects relating to pre-reading effects are developed, but pre-reading object holding for pre-reading effects is the newest holding at the time of the variation start effect (pending image 9A 3rd hold in (see figure).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (B), the first pre-reading start effect is executed. In the first pre-reading start effect, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped with the pre-reading symbol, and the first pre-reading effect is started. Further, in the first pre-reading start effect, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C are continuously displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107C, a second lookahead start effect is performed. The second pre-reading start effect is an effect in the next change of the change in which the first pre-reading start effect of FIG. 107 (B) is performed. In the second pre-reading start effect, in the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped with the pre-reading symbol, and the first pre-reading effect is continuously performed. Further, in the second pre-reading start effect, the holding icon corresponding to the pre-reading target holding of the first holding icon 9A changes on the display screen 7b, and an image representing the pre-reading symbol is displayed in the holding icon. Pre-reading effect is started. The first pre-reading effect and the second pre-reading effect are continued until the change corresponding to the pre-reading target hold is performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (D), reach effect is performed. The reach effect is an effect to be executed during a change corresponding to the pre-read target hold. In this reach effect, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the friend character CRA and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. The second hold icon 9C includes an image representing a pre-read symbol as a second pre-reading effect. This reach effect is an effect that is performed by the fluctuation that is the target of the first pre-reading effect and the second pre-reading effect.

[Special look-ahead effect B]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for describing special pre-reading effect B. In FIG.
First, in the special pre-reading effect B, as shown in FIG. 108 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in variation are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the friend character CRA, the first holding icon 9A, and the second holding icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. Note that, in FIGS. 108 (B) to (D) below, display effects related to pre-reading effects are developed, but pre-reading object holding for pre-reading effects is the newest holding at the time of the variation start effect (pending image 9A 3rd hold in (see figure).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (B), the first pre-reading start effect is executed. In the first pre-reading start effect, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped with the pre-reading symbol, and the first pre-reading effect is started. Further, in the first pre-reading start effect, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C are continuously displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (C), the second pre-reading start effect is executed. The second pre-reading start effect is an effect in the next change of the change in which the first pre-reading start effect of FIG. 108 (B) is performed. In the second pre-reading start effect, in the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped with the pre-reading symbol, and the first pre-reading effect is continuously performed. Further, in the second pre-reading start effect, the holding icon corresponding to the pre-reading target holding of the first holding icon 9A changes on the display screen 7b, and an image representing the pre-reading symbol is displayed in the holding icon. Pre-reading effect is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (D), a second pre-reading end effect is executed. The second pre-reading end effect is an effect in the next change of the change in which the second pre-reading start effect of FIG. 108 (C) is performed. In the second pre-reading end effect, in the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped with the pre-reading symbol, and the first pre-reading effect is continuously performed. Further, in the second pre-reading end effect, on the display screen 7b, the image representing the pre-reading symbol in the holding icon corresponding to the pre-reading target holding of the first holding icon 9A is erased and the effect of returning to the original holding icon is performed . That is, in the second pre-reading end effect, the second pre-reading effect is ended, and the first pre-reading effect is continued. The first pre-reading effect is continued until a change corresponding to pre-reading target hold is performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108E, reach effect is performed. The reach effect is an effect to be executed during a change corresponding to the pre-read target hold. In this reach effect, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the friend character CRA and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. The second hold icon 9 </ b> C is a normal hold icon, not including an image representing a pre-read symbol as a second pre-reading effect. This reach effect is an effect that is performed by the fluctuation that is the target of the first pre-reading effect and the second pre-reading effect.

[Special look-ahead effect C]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for describing the special pre-reading effect C.
First, in the special pre-reading effect C, as shown in FIG. 109 (A), the change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in variation are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the friend character CRA, the first holding icon 9A, and the second holding icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. In FIGS. 109 (B) to (D) below, the display effect related to the pre-reading effect is developed, but the pre-reading object holding for pre-reading effect is the newest holding at the time of the variation start effect (pending image 9A 3rd hold in (see figure).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (B), the first pre-reading start effect is executed. In the first pre-reading start effect, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped with the pre-reading symbol, and the first pre-reading effect is started. Further, in the first pre-reading start effect, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C are continuously displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109C, a second lookahead start effect is performed. The second pre-reading start effect is an effect in the next change of the change in which the first pre-reading start effect of FIG. 109 (B) is performed. In the second pre-reading start effect, in the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped with the pre-reading symbol, and the first pre-reading effect is continuously performed. Further, in the second pre-reading start effect, the holding icon corresponding to the pre-reading target holding of the first holding icon 9A changes on the display screen 7b, and an image representing the pre-reading symbol is displayed in the holding icon. Pre-reading effect is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109D, the first pre-reading end effect is executed. The first pre-reading end effect is an effect in the next change of the change in which the second pre-reading start effect of FIG. 109 (C) is performed. In the first pre-reading end effect, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped with the normal decorative symbol, and it is informed that the first pre-reading effect is finished. Further, in the first pre-reading end effect, the pre-reading symbol in the holding icon corresponding to the pre-reading target holding of the first holding icon 9A is continuously displayed on the display screen 7b. That is, in the first pre-reading end effect, the first pre-reading effect is ended, and the second pre-reading effect is continued.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109E, reach effect is performed. The reach effect is an effect to be executed during a change corresponding to the pre-read target hold. In this reach effect, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the friend character CRA and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. The second hold icon 9C includes an image representing a pre-read symbol as a second pre-reading effect. This reach effect is an effect that is performed by the fluctuation that is the target of the first pre-reading effect and the second pre-reading effect.

[Special look-ahead effect D]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for describing the special pre-reading effect D.
First, in the special pre-reading effect D, as shown in FIG. 110 (A), the change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in variation are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the friend character CRA, the first holding icon 9A, and the second holding icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. In FIGS. 110 (B) to 110 (D) below, display effects relating to pre-reading effects are developed, but pre-reading target holding for pre-reading effects is the newest holding at the time of the variation start effect (pending image 9A 3rd hold in (see figure).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (B), the first pre-reading start effect is executed. In the first pre-reading start effect, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped with the pre-reading symbol, and the first pre-reading effect is started. Further, in the first pre-reading start effect, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C are continuously displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110C, a second lookahead start effect is performed. The second pre-reading start effect is an effect in the next variation of the change in which the first pre-reading start effect of FIG. 110 (B) is performed. In the second pre-reading start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed on the display screen 7a in the first pre-reading start effect are moved to the display screen 7b and displayed, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7b. Is temporarily stopped with the pre-reading symbol, and the first pre-reading effect is continuously performed. Further, in the second pre-reading start effect, the holding icon corresponding to the pre-reading target holding of the first holding icon 9A displayed on the display screen 7a in the first pre-reading start effect is moved to the display screen 7a and displayed In 7a, an image representing the pre-read symbol is displayed in the hold icon, and the second pre-reading effect is started. The first pre-reading effect and the second pre-reading effect are continued until the change corresponding to the pre-reading target hold is performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (D), reach effect is performed. The reach effect is an effect to be executed during a change corresponding to the pre-read target hold. In this reach effect, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7b, and the friend character CRA and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. The second hold icon 9C includes an image representing a pre-read symbol as a second pre-reading effect. This reach effect is an effect that is performed by the fluctuation that is the target of the first pre-reading effect and the second pre-reading effect.

[Special look-ahead effect E]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for describing the special pre-reading effect E.
The special pre-reading effect E uses only the display screen 7 a without using the display screen 7 b.
First, in the special pre-reading effect E, as shown in FIG. 111 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in variation are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the friend character CRA, the first suspension icon 9A, and the second suspension icon 9C are displayed. In FIGS. 111 (B) to (D) below, the display effect related to the pre-reading effect is developed, but the pre-reading object holding for pre-reading effect is the newest holding at the time of the variation start effect (pending image 9A 3rd hold in (see figure).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (B), the first pre-reading start effect is executed. In this first look-ahead start effect, on display screen 7a, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped with a look-ahead pattern, a first look-ahead effect is started, and first hold icon 9A and second hold icon 9C continue Is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (C), the second pre-reading start effect is executed. The second pre-reading start effect is an effect in the next change of the change of the first pre-reading start effect of FIG. 111 (B). In the second pre-reading start effect, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped with the pre-reading symbol, and the first pre-reading effect is continuously performed, and corresponds to the pre-reading target hold of the first hold icon 9A. The hold icon to be changed changes, and an image representing the pre-reading symbol is displayed in the hold icon, and the second look-ahead effect is started. The first pre-reading effect and the second pre-reading effect are continued until the change corresponding to the pre-reading target hold is performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (D), reach effect is performed. The reach effect is an effect to be executed during a change corresponding to the pre-read target hold. In this reach effect, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and the second hold icon 9C are displayed. The second hold icon 9C includes an image representing a pre-read symbol as a second pre-reading effect. This reach effect is an effect that is performed by the fluctuation that is the target of the first pre-reading effect and the second pre-reading effect.

  The first prefetching effect in the special prefetching effects A to E is performed when the number of reservations (the number of first suspension icons 9A) is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, three or more). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first pre-reading effect may be executed regardless of the number of reservations.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of special pre-reading effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the special prefetching effect in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special prefetching effect, the second prefetching effect is configured to be started after the first prefetch effect is started. According to this configuration, the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the special prefetch effect B in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 108, the second prefetch effect ends before the first prefetch effect ends. According to this configuration, the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 109, in the special pre-reading effect C, the first pre-reading effect is configured to end before the second pre-reading effect ends. According to this configuration, the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the special prefetching effects A to E in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the case of the special prefetching effects A to E, in the case of the first prefetching effect, the number of holdings (the number of first holding icons 9A) is a predetermined value or more It is configured to be started. According to this configuration, the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the special prefetching effects A to C in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special prefetching effects A to C, the first prefetching effect is executed on the display screen 7a, and the second prefetching effect is on the display screen 7b. It is configured to be executed. According to this configuration, the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of special pre-reading effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, five patterns of special pre-reading effects A to E are implemented as special pre-reading effects, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of patterns A to E An effect combining patterns may be implemented.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are performed adjacent to each other in the special prefetching effects A to E, but the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, the first image display 7A and / or the second image display 7B may be moved to perform special pre-reading effects A to E. Further, special pre-reading effects A to E may be performed in a state where the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are separated by a predetermined distance.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the special prefetching effects A to E are performed, the first image display device 7A may be the main display device, and the second image display device 7B may be the sub display device. The image display device 7A may be a sub display device, and the second image display device 7B may be a main display device. In this case, the main display device can be defined as a display device having a longer time for changing the decorative symbol than the sub display device.

[Modification 4]
In the special prefetching effects A to D in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 110, the first prefetching effect and the second prefetching effect are respectively executed on display screens different from each other. The present invention is not limited to this, and the first pre-reading effect and the second pre-reading effect may be performed on the same display screen from the middle or from the beginning.

[Modification 5]
In the special prefetching effect A in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after starting the first prefetching effect and the b second prefetching effect, these two prefetching effects end until the fluctuation corresponding to the prefetching target holding respectively. In special pre-reading effect B or special pre-reading effect C, after starting 1st pre-reading effect and b 2nd pre-reading effect, either pre-reading effect until it becomes fluctuation which corresponds to pre-reading object reservation It is configured to finish. In these configurations, when the special pre-reading effect A appears, the jackpot expectation can be made higher than when the special pre-reading effect B or the special pre-reading effect C appears. Alternatively, when the special pre-reading effect B or the special pre-reading effect C appears, the jackpot expectation may be higher than when the special pre-reading effect A appears.

[Modification 6]
In the special prefetching effect B in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the first prefetching effect and the b second prefetching effect are started, the second prefetching effect is ended before the fluctuation corresponding to the prefetching target holding is started. In the special pre-reading effect C, after the first pre-reading effect and the b second pre-reading effect are started, the first pre-reading effect is ended before the fluctuation corresponding to the pre-reading object suspension is reached. In these configurations, in these configurations, when the special pre-reading effect B appears, the jackpot expectation can be made higher than when the special pre-reading effect C appears. Conversely, when the special pre-reading effect C appears, the jackpot expectation may be higher than when the special pre-reading effect B appears.

[Modification 7]
In the special prefetching effects A to D in the gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment, the first prefetching effect and the second prefetching effect are the same as the prefetching target holdings, but the present invention is not limited to this. Target hold may be different. For example, the pre-read target hold of the first pre-read effect may be a hold older than the pre-read target hold of the second pre-read effect, or the pre-read target hold of the first pre-read effect is a pre-read target hold of the second pre-read effect May be a new hold.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B4-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a pre-reading effect of the first aspect as one of a plurality of pre-reading effects,
The second display effect is a pre-reading effect of a second aspect as one of a plurality of pre-reading effects,
The second display effect is started after the first display effect is started.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect B4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1, which is
The second display effect may end before the first display effect ends.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect B 4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1, which is
The first display effect may end before the second display effect ends.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect B4-4]
A game machine according to any one of modes 1 to 3, which is:
The first display effect is executed when the number of holdings is a predetermined value or more.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect B4-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4, wherein
The display means comprises a first display means and a second display means.
The first display effect is executed by the first display means, and the second display effect is executed by the second display means.
A game machine characterized by

  The straddle reach effect and the music information display effect A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. In addition, the extra reach effect and the music information display effect are effects that can be executed during the variation of the decorative symbol, during the demonstration screen (demonstration screen), or during the customer waiting screen.

[Midori reach production]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the stride reach effect.
First, in the straddle effect, as shown in FIG. 112 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in variation are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the friend character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (B), reach effect A is executed. In the reach effect A, the reach state is represented on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbols 8L and 8R. In the reach effect A, the friend character CRA is continuously displayed on the display screen 7 b. Reach production A includes normal reach production with relatively low jackpot expectation and super reach production with relatively high jackpot expectation. Super reach production is a production that may be developed and executed from normal reach production. In addition, in this reach production, it is a reach state with "6" symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 112C, reach effect B is executed. In the reach effect B, the decorative symbol in the reach state is continuously displayed. In the reach effect B, the friend character CRA is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b.

FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the music information display effect A.
First, in the music information display effect A, as shown in FIG. 113A, a demonstration screen display effect is executed. In this demonstration screen display effect, the game information selection image B5A is displayed on the display screen 7a. The game information selection image B5A is an image for selecting one piece of game information from a plurality of pieces of game information such as music information, light amount information, or volume information. Further, in this demonstration screen display effect, the button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7b. The button image BTN represents the effect button 63. In other words, the button image BTN is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. In this demonstration screen display effect, the player can select one piece of music information from the game information selection image B5A by operating the effect button 63. The game information in the game information selection image B5A may include various information such as character information, game content information, and reach information, in addition to music information, light amount information, or volume information.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (B), a music selection effect is executed. In this music selection effect, a music selection image B5B is displayed so as to straddle the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. The music selection image B5B is an image for selecting one piece of music information from a plurality of pieces of music information such as music A, music B, or music C. Further, in the music selection effect, the button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7b. In this music selection effect, the player can select one piece of music information from the music selection image B5B by operating the effect button 63.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 113C, the music determination effect is executed. In the music determination effect, the music image B5C is displayed so as to straddle the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. The music image B5C is an image representing music information determined by the music selection effect.

[Music information display effect B]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the music information display effect B.
First, in the music information display effect B, as shown in FIG. 114 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in variation are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the friend character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (B), reach effect A is executed. In the reach effect A, the reach state is represented on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbols 8L and 8R. In the reach effect A, the friend character CRA is continuously displayed on the display screen 7 b. Reach production A includes normal reach production with relatively low jackpot expectation and super reach production with relatively high jackpot expectation. Super reach production is a production that may be developed and executed from normal reach production. In addition, in this reach production, it is a reach state with "6" symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (C), a music selection effect during reach effect is executed. In the reach selection music selection effect, a music selection image B5D is displayed so as to straddle the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. The music selection image B5D is an image for selecting one piece of music information from a plurality of pieces of music information such as the music A, the music B, or the music C. Further, in the reach effect during the music selection effect, the reach state is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbols 8L and 8R, and the friend character CRA is continuously displayed on the display screen 7b. In this reach effect music selection effect, the player can select one piece of music information in the music selection image B5D by operating the select button 68.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (D), a music determination effect during reach effect is executed. In the music determination effect during reach effect, the music image B5E is displayed so as to straddle the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. The music image B5E is an image representing the music information determined by the music selection effect. In addition, in the music determination effect during reach effect, the reach state is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbols 8L and 8R, and the friend character CRA is continuously displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (E), reach effect B is executed. In the reach effect B, the decorative symbol in the reach state is continuously displayed. In the reach effect B, the friend character CRA is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b.

[Music information display effect C]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the music information display effect C.
First, in the music information display effect C, as shown in FIG. 115 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in variation are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the friend character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (B), reach effect A is executed. In the reach effect A, the reach state is represented on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbols 8L and 8R. In the reach effect A, the friend character CRA is continuously displayed on the display screen 7 b. Reach production A includes normal reach production with relatively low jackpot expectation and super reach production with relatively high jackpot expectation. Super reach production is a production that may be developed and executed from normal reach production. In addition, in this reach production, it is a reach state with "6" symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (C), a music selection effect during reach effect is executed. In the reach selection music selection effect, a music selection image B5D is displayed on the display screen 7b. The music selection image B5D is an image for selecting one piece of music information from a plurality of pieces of music information such as the music A, the music B, or the music C. Further, in the reach effect during the music selection effect, the reach state is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbols 8L and 8R, and the friend character CRA is continuously displayed on the display screen 7b. In this reach effect music selection effect, the player can select one piece of music information in the music selection image B5D by operating the select button 68.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (D), a music determination effect during reach effect is executed. In the music determination effect during the reach effect, the music image B5E is displayed on the display screen 7a. The music image B5E is an image representing the music information determined by the music selection effect. In addition, in the music determination effect during reach effect, the reach state is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbols 8L and 8R, and the friend character CRA is continuously displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (E), reach effect B is executed. In the reach effect B, the decorative symbol in the reach state is continuously displayed. In the reach effect B, the friend character CRA is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b.

[Music information display effect D]
FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining the music information display effect D.
First, in the music information display effect B, as shown in FIG. 116 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in variation are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the friend character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (B), reach effect A is executed. In the reach effect A, the reach state is represented on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbols 8L and 8R. In the reach effect A, the friend character CRA is continuously displayed on the display screen 7 b. Reach production A includes normal reach production with relatively low jackpot expectation and super reach production with relatively high jackpot expectation. Super reach production is a production that may be developed and executed from normal reach production. In addition, in this reach production, it is a reach state with "6" symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (C), a music selection effect during reach effect is executed. In the reach selection music selection effect, a music selection image B5D is displayed so as to straddle the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. The music selection image B5D is an image for selecting one piece of music information from a plurality of pieces of music information such as the music A, the music B, or the music C. Further, in the reach effect during the music selection effect, the reach state is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbols 8L and 8R, and the friend character CRA is continuously displayed on the display screen 7b. In this reach effect music selection effect, the player can select one piece of music information in the music selection image B5D by operating the select button 68.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (D), a music determination effect during reach effect is performed. In the music determination effect during reach effect, the music image B5E is displayed so as to straddle the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. The music image B5E is an image representing the music information determined by the music selection effect. In addition, in the music determination effect during reach effect, the reach state is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbols 8L and 8R, and the friend character CRA is continuously displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (E), reach effect B is executed. In the reach effect B, the decorative symbol in the reach state is continuously displayed. Further, in the reach effect B, the friend character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of a cross reach production and a music information display production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112 to FIG. 116, the reach reach effect using the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, and the music information display using the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b It is possible to According to this configuration, the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113 to FIG. 114 and FIG. 116, in the music information display effect, music information such as music selection image and music image is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. Is configured to According to this configuration, the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 and 114 to 116, the reach effect (ally character CRA) is spread between the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b in the overlap reach effect or the music information display effect. Is configured to be displayed. According to this configuration, the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 to 116, in the music information display effect, an effect of displaying music information such as a music selection image or a music image is performed during reach production. . According to this configuration, the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113 to FIG. 116, when the music selection image is displayed and the music is determined in the music information display effect, the player performs the effect button 63 or the select button 68. The music is determined by operating the. According to this configuration, the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a reach reach production and a music information display production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, four patterns of music information display effects A to D are implemented as the music information display effects, but the present invention is not limited to this, and among the A to D An effect combining a plurality of patterns may be implemented.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are performed adjacent to each other in the overlap reach effect and the music information display effect A to D, but the present invention It is not limited to this. For example, the first image display device 7A and / or the second image display device 7B may be moved to perform straddle reach effect and music information display effect A to D. In addition, the reach reach effect and the music information display effect A to D may be performed while the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are separated by a predetermined distance.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the first image display device 7A is the main display device and the second image display device 7B is the sub display device when the overlap reach effect and the music information display effect A to D are performed. Alternatively, the first image display device 7A may be a sub display device, and the second image display device 7B may be a main display device. In this case, the main display device can be defined as a display device having a longer time for changing the decorative symbol than the sub display device.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when performing overreach reach effect and music information display effect A to D, the decorative symbol used in the reach effect is displayed so as to straddle the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. It is also good.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the music information display effects B to D, an effect of displaying music information such as a music selection image and a music image during reach effect is performed, but the present invention The present invention is not limited to this, and an effect of displaying music information such as a music selection image or a music image may be performed during a change start effect or during a jackpot game.

[Modification 6]
In the game information display effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the music selection image is displayed to determine the music, the player operates the presentation button 63 or the select button 68 to determine the music. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the music selection image is displayed to determine the music, the music may be determined by an arbitrary lottery or the like without depending on the operation of the player.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the overlap reach effect or the music information display effect A to D is executed using the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, but the present invention is not limited to this. Further, in addition to the music reach display effect or the music information display effect A to D display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, the execution may be performed using a plurality of display devices (display screens).

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[B5-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
The display means comprises a first display means and a second display means different from the first display means.
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a reach effect,
The second display effect is a music display effect for displaying game music information,
The first display effect may be performed using the first display means and the second display means,
The second display effect may be performed using the first display means and the second display means.
A game machine characterized by

[B5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1, which is
The second display effect displays the music information across the first display means and the second display means.
A game machine characterized by

[B5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2, wherein
The first display effect performs the reach effect across the first display means and the second display means.
A game machine characterized by

[B5-4]
A game machine according to any one of modes 1 to 3, which is:
The second display effect is performed during the first display effect,
A game machine characterized by

[B5-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4, wherein
It has an operation means capable of accepting the operation of the player,
The second display effect is performed based on an operation of the operation means by the player.
A game machine characterized by

  The straddle reach effect and the countdown effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 117 to 121. These effects are performed in parallel with the variation of the effect pattern. The stride reach effect is executed when the reach is formed by the effect pattern. The countdown effect is executed as a countdown to reach effect or a countdown to a determined effect of jackpot determination.

[Across reach reach production A]
FIG. 117 is a diagram for describing straddle reach effect A. FIG.
First, in the straddle reach effect A, as shown in FIG. 117 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the effect pattern is variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. In the lower part of the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B, the holding image 9A, the holding image 9B, and the holding digested image 9C are displayed.

  As one mode following the change start effect, reach effect is executed as shown in FIG. 117 (B). In the reach effect, the effect symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped with the same symbol to form a reach. At this time, the effect symbols 8L and 8R to be temporarily stopped are displayed on both of the display screens 7a and 7b. That is, the “crossing display” is performed across the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 117 (C), following the temporary stop display of the effect symbols 8L and 8R in the reach effect, the display device movement effect is executed. In the display device movement effect, the movement in the direction in which the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B approach each other (the direction in which the overlap becomes large) and the movement in the direction away from each other (the direction in which the overlap becomes smaller) And repeat.

[Across reach reach production B]
FIG. 118 is a diagram for describing the stride reach effect B. FIG.
First, in the straddle reach effect B, as shown in FIG. 118 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the effect pattern is variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. In the lower part of the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B, the holding image 9A, the holding image 9B, and the holding digested image 9C are displayed.

  As one mode following the fluctuation start effect, reach effect is executed as shown in FIG. 118 (B). In reach effect, the effect symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped with the same symbol to form a reach. At this time, the effect symbols 8L and 8R to be temporarily stopped are displayed on both of the display screens 7a and 7b. That is, the “crossing display” is performed across the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 118 (C), a symbol movement effect (1) is executed following the temporary stop display of the effect symbols 8L and 8R in the reach effect. In the symbol movement effect (1), as indicated by the arrow YG, the effect symbols 8L and 8R move to the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A while rotating around the vertical axis, and are temporarily stopped and displayed .

[Across reach reach production C]
FIG. 119 is a diagram for describing the stride reach effect C. FIG.
First, in the stride reach effect C, as shown in FIG. 119 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the effect pattern is variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. In the lower part of the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B, the holding image 9A, the holding image 9B, and the holding digested image 9C are displayed.

  As one mode following the fluctuation start effect, reach effect is executed as shown in FIG. 119 (B). In reach effect, the effect symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped with the same symbol to form a reach. At this time, the effect symbols 8L and 8R to be temporarily stopped are displayed on both of the display screens 7a and 7b. That is, the “crossing display” is performed across the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (C), the symbol movement effect (2) is executed following the temporary stop display of the effect symbols 8L and 8R in the reach effect. In the symbol movement effect (2), the effect symbols 8L and 8R move to the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B and are temporarily stopped, as indicated by the arrow YG.

[Countdown production A]
FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining the countdown effect A.
First, in countdown effect A, fluctuation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. 120 (A). In this variation start effect, the effect pattern is variably displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. In the lower part of the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B, the reserve images 9A and 9B and the reserve digest image 9C are displayed.

  As one mode following the fluctuation start effect, as shown in FIG. 120 (B), count effect (1) is executed. In count effect (1), a count image CG ("5" in FIG. 120B) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. Thereafter, the count image CG is displayed as “4” → “3” → “2” → “1”.

  When the count image CG becomes “0”, reach effect is executed as shown in FIG. 120 (C). In reach effect, the effect symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped with the same symbol to form a reach. At this time, the effect symbols 8L and 8R to be temporarily stopped are displayed on both of the display screens 7a and 7b. That is, the “crossing display” is performed across the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B.

[Countdown effect B]
FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining the countdown effect B.
First, in the countdown effect B, as shown in FIG. 121 (A), reach effect is executed following the fluctuation start effect. In reach effect, the effect symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped with the same symbol to form a reach. At this time, the effect symbols 8L and 8R to be temporarily stopped are displayed on both of the display screens 7a and 7b. That is, the “crossing display” is performed across the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B.

  As one aspect following the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 121 (B), a count effect (2) is executed. In count effect (2), the count image CG ("5" in FIG. 121 (B)) is displayed on both of the display screens 7a and 7b. That is, the “crossing display” is performed across the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B. Thereafter, the count image CG is displayed as “4” → “3” → “2” → “1”.

  When the count image CG becomes "0", as shown in FIG. 121 (C), the effect of symbol matching is executed. In the symbol-matching effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol. At this time, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R to be temporarily stopped are displayed on both of the display screens 7a, 7b. That is, straddle display across the display devices 7A and 7B is performed.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect in this embodiment is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 117 to 121, straddle display across the image display devices 7A and 7B is enabled. Specifically, reach effect (FIG. 117 (B), FIG. 118 (B), FIG. 119 (B), FIG. 120 (C), FIG. 121 (A)), display device movement effect (FIG. 117 (C)) In the count effect (2) (FIG. 121 (B)) and the symbol matching effect (FIG. 121 (C)), straddle display is performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the display of the number image powerful in the effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117 (C), the display device movement effect is executed. In the display device movement effect, the movement in the direction in which the two display devices 7A and 7B approach each other (the direction in which the overlap becomes large) and the movement in the direction away from each other (the direction in which the overlap becomes small) are repeated. According to this configuration, together with the stride display, the display of the number image can be made powerful, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the reach effect (FIG. 117 (B), FIG. 118 (B), FIG. 119 (B), FIG. 120 (C) and FIG. 121 (A)), the display device movement effect (FIG. 117) (C)) In the symbol-arranged effect (FIG. 121 (C)), straddle display of effect symbols is performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the display of the effect pattern powerful, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, straddle display is performed at the time of the reach effect (FIGS. 117B, 118B, 119B, 120C, and 121A). According to this configuration, it is possible to exert a force on the reach effect and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the symbol movement effect is executed. In symbol movement effect (1), as shown in FIG. 118 (C), as indicated by arrow YG, effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on first image display device 7A while being rotated about an axis in the vertical direction. It moves to the screen 7a and is displayed temporarily. In the symbol movement effect (2), as shown in FIG. 119 (C), the effect symbols 8L and 8R move to the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B as indicated by the arrow YG, and the temporary stop display is made. Be done. According to this configuration, since the effect design moves after being displayed across the display, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, straddle display of the count image CG is performed in the count effect (2) (FIG. 121 (B)). As a result, it is possible to give the counting effect (2) a force, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 120 (B), in the count effect (1), the count image CG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 121 (B), in count effect (2), the count image CG is displayed across the display screen 7a of the first image display 7A and the display screen 7b of the second image display 7B ( Cross over). According to this configuration, it is possible to give a width to the counting effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Below, the modification in this embodiment is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117 to FIG. 121, the straddle display of the rendering symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the stride display of the count image CG are taken as an example. It is not limited to this. As long as it is only necessary to straddle display of a number image, for example, the acquired number of balls (including a numerical value based on the number of balls), the number of consecutive shots, the number of prize balls, the number of rounds, etc. may be straddled and displayed as a number image.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 117 to 121, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to include three or more image display devices. At this time, straddling display may be performed across display screens of three or more image display devices.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117C, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B move in the vertical direction so as to overlap each other. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to move in the left-right direction or in the diagonal direction. Further, three or more display devices may be moved so as to change their relative positions.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B6-1]
A plurality of display devices capable of displaying numerical images;
And a display control unit configured to display the numeral image on the display unit,
A game machine characterized in that the display control means enables straddling display in which the numeral image straddles the plurality of display devices.

[Aspect B6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-1,
And a drive control unit capable of moving the plurality of display devices to change the relative position of the display devices.
A game machine characterized in that the drive control means can change the relative position of the display device in parallel with the straddling display by the display control means.

[Aspect B6-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B6-1 or aspect B6-2,
A game machine characterized in that the display control means enables the straddle display when displaying a temporary stop of a rendering symbol as the numeral image.

[Aspect B6-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-4,
A game machine characterized in that the display control means performs temporary stop display of the effect pattern by the stride display upon reaching effect.

[Aspect B6-5]
A game machine according to aspect B6-3 or aspect B6-4, wherein
The display control means moves the effect pattern to any one of the plurality of display devices following the temporary stop display of the effect pattern by the straddle display.

[Aspect B6-6]
A game machine according to any one of modes B6-1 to B6-5, wherein
A game machine characterized in that the display control means enables the straddle display in counting display for displaying the numeral images in a predetermined order.

[Aspect B 6-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-6,
The display control means is capable of performing a first count display for performing the count display by the straddle display and a second count display for performing the count display on any of the plurality of display devices. Gaming machine.

  In the following, with reference to FIG. 122 to FIG. 126, the loose-luck effect, the normal reach loss effect, and the symbol promotion display effect will be described. These effects are performed in parallel with the variable display of the effect pattern. The loose move effect is a lost effect when the effect pattern is stopped without the reach formation. The normal reach loss effect is a loss effect in which the effect pattern is reach-formed and then stopped without developing into an SP reach or the like. A symbol promotion display production is production of whether or not to be promoted to a probability variation symbol after a jackpot is decided.

[Don't play without a break]
FIG. 122 is a diagram for explaining a disconnection effect.
First, as shown in FIG. 122 (A), the variation start effect is executed in the loose-back effect. In this variation start effect, the effect pattern is variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. In the lower part of the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B, the holding image 9A, the holding image 9B, and the holding digested image 9C are displayed.

  As one aspect following the change start effect, as shown in FIG. 122 (B), a middle symbol change effect (1) is executed. In the middle symbol variation effect (1), the left and right representation symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A without forming a reach, and the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A The effect pattern 8C which is a middle symbol is variably displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (C), a loose final decision is performed. In the loose-back finalization effect, after the intermediate design symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed, the presentation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly displayed.

[Normal reach loss production A]
FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining the normal reach loss effect A.
In the normal reach loss effect A, after the reach is formed by the effect symbols 8L and 8R following the change start effect, as shown in FIG. 123 (A), the middle symbol change effect (2) is executed. In the middle symbol variation effect (2), the middle design symbol is displayed fluctuatingly across the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B. Specifically, it is displayed so as to flow from the upper part to the lower part of the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A, and thereafter displayed so as to flow from the upper part to the lower part of the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (B), a middle symbol temporary stop effect (1) is executed. In the middle symbol temporary stop effect (1), the middle design symbol 8C which is the middle symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A, while the effect symbol 8C, which is a middle symbol, is provisionally displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. Stop display.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (C), a middle symbol movement effect (1) is executed. In the middle symbol movement effect (1), the effect symbol 8C temporarily displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B is moved to the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A as indicated by an arrow YG. Then, on the display screen 7a, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a fixed stop.

[Normal reach loss production B]
FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining the normal reach loss effect B.
In the normal reach loss effect B, after the reach is formed by the effect symbols 8L and 8R following the change start effect, as shown in FIG. 124 (A), the middle symbol change effect (2) is executed. In the middle symbol variation effect (2), the middle design symbol is displayed fluctuatingly across the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B. Specifically, it is displayed so as to flow from the upper part to the lower part of the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A, and thereafter displayed so as to flow from the upper part to the lower part of the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (B), a middle symbol temporary stop effect (2) is executed. In middle symbol temporary stop production (2), production design 8C which is the middle symbol is temporary stop indication. At this time, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A, while the effect symbol 8C which is the middle symbol is the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the first It is displayed across the display screen 7b of the two-image display device 7B. That is, the upper portion of the effect pattern 8C is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the lower portion of the effect pattern 8C is displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (C), a middle symbol movement effect (2) is executed. In the middle symbol movement effect (2), the effect symbol 8C temporarily displayed in the form of straddle display is moved to the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A as indicated by the arrow YG. Then, on the display screen 7a, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a fixed stop.

[Design promotion display production A]
FIG. 125 is a diagram for describing symbol promotion display effect A. FIG.
In the symbol promotion display effect A, after the reach is formed by the effect symbols 8L and 8R following the change start effect, as shown in FIG. 125 (A), a symbol matching effect showing a big hit is executed. In the symbol matching effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (B), symbol promotion effect (1) is executed. In the symbol promotion effect (1), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R temporarily displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A are displayed small as if moved to the back of the display screen, and then forward again The rendering symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed as if they were headed. At this time, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed across the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. That is, the upper portion of the rendering symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the lower portion of the rendering symbol 8C is displayed on the display screen 7b. In addition, there are cases where it is promoted to a definite variation design and when it is not promoted, it remains as the original design. FIG. 125 (B) shows a state of being promoted to "7" which is a probability variation symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 125C, symbol movement effect (1) is executed. In the symbol movement effect (1), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R temporarily displayed in the form of straddling display move to the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A as indicated by the arrow YG. Then, on the display screen 7a, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a fixed stop.

[Design promotion display production B]
FIG. 126 is a diagram for describing symbol promotion display effect B. FIG.
In the symbol promotion display effect B, after the reach is formed by the effect symbols 8L and 8R following the change start effect, as shown in FIG. 126 (A), a symbol matching effect showing a big hit is executed. In the symbol matching effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (B), symbol promotion effect (2) is executed. In the symbol promotion effect (2), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R temporarily displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A are displayed small as if moved to the back of the display screen, and then forward again The rendering symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed as if they were headed. At this time, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed across the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. That is, the upper portion of the rendering symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the lower portion of the rendering symbol 8C is displayed on the display screen 7b. Moreover, the rendering symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are large symbols drawn in the vertical direction, and occupy most of the display screens 7a, 7b. In addition, there are cases where it is promoted to a definite variation design and when it is not promoted, it remains as the original design. In FIG. 126 (B), a mode that it was promoted to "7" which is a probability variation symbol was shown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (C), symbol movement effect (2) is executed. In the symbol movement effect (2), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R temporarily displayed in the form of straddling display are moved to the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B as indicated by the arrow YG. Then, on the display screen 7b, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a fixed stop.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect in this embodiment is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 122 to 126, the rendering symbol is temporarily stopped on one of the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. Display and then move to the other. In addition, the rendering symbol is displayed straddling the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B, and then moved to one of the display screens 7a and 7b. According to this configuration, since the temporary stop display is changed in the variable display of the effect pattern, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 123 (B), after making the display pattern 7b of the second image display device 7B temporarily stop the effect pattern 8C which is the middle symbol, FIG. 123 (C As shown in), the rendering symbol 8C is moved to the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A, and the decision display is stopped. In addition, as shown in FIG. 124 (B), the intermediate design symbol 8C is displayed across the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. As shown in 124 (C), the effect pattern 8C is moved to the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A, and the decision display is stopped. According to this configuration, since the temporary stop display of the middle symbol at the time of normal reach is changed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 123 (A) and 124 (A), the effect pattern which is the middle symbol is the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the second image display device. The variable display is performed across the display screen 7b of 7B. According to this configuration, as compared to the disconnection effect shown in FIG. 122, since the variation of the middle symbol after reach formation is dynamic, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 125 and FIG. 126, the effect symbols to be displayed for temporary stop and moved are three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R showing a big hit. According to this configuration, since the display of the effect pattern in the case of the jackpot becomes a powerful display, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 125 (B) and FIG. 126 (B), the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the display of the second image display device 7B at the time of symbol promotion effect. The display is made straddling the screen 7b, and thereafter, it is moved to one of the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. According to this configuration, since the symbol promotion display effect in the case of the jackpot becomes a powerful display, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Below, the modification in this embodiment is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 123 to FIG. 126, the normal reach loss effect and the symbol promotion display effect are described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention may be applied not only to normal reach loss effect production but also to stop a normal reach hit effect, an SP reach loss effect effect, an SP reach hit effect, an off-leach effect effect, etc.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 123 (B), FIG. 123 (C), FIG. 124 (B) and FIG. 124 (C), temporary stop display of the effect pattern 8C which is a middle symbol and The subsequent movement was described. On the other hand, if the rendering symbol to be stopped third is the right symbol or the left symbol, the symbol may be temporarily stopped and then moved thereafter.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 123 (A) and 124 (A), the effect symbol 8C which is a middle symbol is configured to fluctuate across the display screens 7a and 7b. On the other hand, if the rendering symbol to be stopped third is the right symbol or the left symbol, the symbol may be varied across the display screens 7a and 7b.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the symbol promotion display effect is described as an example. On the other hand, during the determined effect of the jackpot, straddle display of the three effect design and the subsequent movement may be performed.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B 7-1]
A plurality of display devices capable of displaying the effect pattern,
And a display control means for displaying the effect pattern on the display device,
The display control means performs, in the temporary stop display of the effect pattern, straddling display of the effect pattern over the first image display device or the first image display device and the second image display device, and thereafter, the effect symbol A game machine characterized by moving to a second image display device and displaying a confirmation stop.

[Aspect B7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the rendering symbol is one remaining final rendering symbol in a case where reach formation is made with two rendering symbols.

[Aspect B7-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-2,
A game machine characterized in that the display control means variably displays the final stop effect design pattern across the first image display device and the second image display device when the reach formation is performed.

[Aspect B7-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the effect pattern is three jackpot effect symbols indicating that it has become a big hit.

[Aspect B7-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-4,
The display control means changes the jackpot effect design to the probability change jackpot effect design pattern or performs the stride display without changing the jackpot effect design pattern when promoting to a probability change jackpot effect design symbol indicating a probability change big hit. It moves to said 2nd image display device, and a decision stop display is performed. A game machine characterized by things.

[Other modifications]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effects using the first image display device 7A (display screen 7a) and the second image display device 7B (display screen 7b) have been described, but in these effects, predetermined characters , A decorative symbol, a hold icon, a button image BTN, or a select button image BTNS moves from the display screen 7a to the display screen 7b, moves from the display screen 7b to the display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b It may be displayed across the screen.

  Although the gaming machine 1 of the said embodiment mentioned and demonstrated the pachinko gaming machine as an example, it is not restricted to this. For example, the present invention may be applied to a rotary machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball game machine, or a ball game machine in place of a pachinko machine. When the gaming machine 1 is used as a slot machine, the gaming medium may be changed from gaming balls to gaming medals.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, although the effect button 63 is provided as an operation unit for the player to operate, the invention is not limited thereto, and a lever, a trigger or the like may be used as an operation unit for the player to operate. . Moreover, in the display effect in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display effect may be executed using the button image representing the effect button 63, but instead, the display effect is performed using the image representing the sword member 64. The display effect may be performed using an image representing a lever or a trigger.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, time is displayed using the timer value of the timer image as the timer display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Time may be represented by a meter method or an indicator method as the timer display.

  Although the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the gaming machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine which does not have a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed type gaming machine.

  Moreover, you may combine two or more presentation examples and / or a modification among several presentation examples and / or a modification which were mentioned above. Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 may have a sub display device in addition to the image display device 7. In this case, the display effect described above may be performed by the sub display device.

  As mentioned above, although this aspect was demonstrated based on embodiment and a modification, embodiment of the above-mentioned aspect is for making an understanding of this aspect easy, and does not limit this aspect. The present embodiment can be modified and improved without departing from the spirit and the scope of the claims, and the present embodiment includes the equivalents thereof.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Game machine 3 ... Game area 7 ... Image display apparatus 9A ... 1st reservation icon 9B ... 1st reservation icon 9C ... 2nd reservation icon 15 ... Board movable body 20 ... 1st starting opening (1st ball entrance)
21 ... 2nd starting opening (2nd ball entry)
81 ... microcomputer for game control 91 ... microcomputer for effect control 101 ... microcomputer for image control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects, and a first operation unit and a second operation unit operable by a player,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a first operation unit image representing the first operation unit while the decorative symbol is changing,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a mode suggestion image that suggests that the mode is being executed in one of a plurality of game modes while the decorative symbol is changing,
It said third display effect is a demonstration of the second operating part image representing the second operating unit during reach effect still appears,
There may be a combined effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect.
Wherein the combination effect, when the first display effect is being performed, the second display effect is performed, wherein the first operation portion image and the mode suggested image is displayed in correspondence, the When the first operation unit is operated, another mode suggestion image can be displayed, and the first display unit image and the mode suggestion image are displayed in association with each other, the third display When an effect is performed, and the second operation unit is operated by the player in a state in which the first operation unit image and the second operation unit image are displayed, the effect is different from the effect of displaying the mode suggestion image The prescribed effect of is performed,
A game machine characterized by

Images